bs240is
Post on 25-Dec-2015
22 Views
Preview:
DESCRIPTION
TRANSCRIPT
Installation
Base Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
2 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
f Important Notice on Product Safety
DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR DEATH - FOLLOW ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected to the system mustcomply with the applicable safety standards.Hazardous voltages are present at the AC power supply lines in this electrical equipment. Some components mayalso have high operating temperatures.Failure to observe and follow all installation and safety instructions can result in serious personal injuryor property damage.Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The same text in German:
Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
LEBENSGEFAHR - BEACHTEN SIE ALLE INSTALLATIONSHINWEISE.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Alle an das System angeschlossenenGeräte müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen.In diesen Anlagen stehen die Netzversorgungsleitungen unter gefährlicher Spannung. Einige Komponentenkönnen auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.Nichtbeachtung der Installations- und Sicherheitshinweise kann zu schweren Körperverletzungen oderSachschäden führen.Deshalb darf nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal das System installieren und warten.
Caution:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with EN 301489. Its class of conformity is defined in tableA30808-X3247-X910-*-7618, which is shipped with each product. This class also corresponds to the limits for aClass A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment isoperated in a commercial environment.This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-dance with the relevant standards referenced in the manual “Guide to Documentation”, may cause harmful inter-ference to radio communications.For system installations it is strictly required to choose all installation sites according to national and local require-ments concerning construction rules and static load capacities of buildings and roofs.For all sites, in particular in residential areas it is mandatory to observe all respectively applicable electromagneticfield / force (EMF) limits. Otherwise harmful personal interference is possible.
Trademarks:
All designations used in this document can be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their own purposescould violate the rights of their owners.
Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006.
Issued by the Communications GroupHofmannstraße 51D-81359 München
Technical modifications possible.Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar asthey are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 3
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Reason for UpdateSummary:
Seventeenth Edition, release-independent, valid from starting Release BR 6.0
Details:
Chapter / Section Reason for Update
2.7.3 New Battery Tray with MK:BATTFIXCB included
Issue HistoryIssue Date of Issue Reason for Update
1 06/2002 First Edition
2 07/2002 Second Edition
3 09/2002 Third Edition
4 11/2002 Fourth Edition
5 04/2003 Fifth Edition
6 12/2003 Sixth Edition
7 02/2004 Seventh Edition
8 03/2004 Eighth Edition
9 05/2004 Ninth Edition
10 08/2004 Tenth Edition
11 01/2005 Eleventh Edition
12 04/2005 Twelfth Edition
13 07/2005 Thirteenth Edition
14 09/2005 Fourteenth Edition
15 11/2005 Fifteenth Edition
16 03/2006 Sixteenth Edition
17 04/2006 Seventeenth Edition
4 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 5
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
This document consists of a total of 188 pages. All pages are issue 17.
Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.1 Purpose of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.2 Installation Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.3 Handling of the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Base Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.1 Position in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.2 Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.3 Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182.4 Construction Overview of the BS-Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182.4.1 Rack Configuration of different BS-Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.4.1.1 Rack Configurations BS-240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.4.1.2 Rack Configurations of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.4.1.3 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.4.1.4 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262.5 Equipment Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272.5.1 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272.5.2 Rack mounted on a Pallet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272.5.3 Rack shipped in a Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282.5.4 Unpacking of Modules and Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302.5.5 Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312.5.5.1 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362.5.5.2 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372.5.6 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240 II / 240XL II. . . . . . . . . . . . . 402.5.7 Back-to-back Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432.6 External Cabling Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502.6.2 Ground and AC- Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582.6.3 Ground and DC- Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602.6.4 Abis-Interface - PCM Link Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622.6.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm Cable Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622.6.4.2 Abis-Interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652.6.4.3 Abis-Interface without ABISCON / OVPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672.6.4.4 Monitoring Interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692.6.5 Alarm Collection Terminal - external Alarm Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712.6.6 Installation of the Mounting Kit OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732.6.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762.6.8 External Alarm Protection for ACTM (EAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802.6.9 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC - internal Alarms / DC Supply. . . . . . . . . 842.6.10 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-3 - internal Alarms / DC Supply . . . . . . . 872.6.11 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-4 - internal Alarms / DC Supply . . . . . . . 892.6.12 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922.6.13 Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932.6.13.1 Preparation of Antenna Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.14 Installation of the Tower Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992.6.14.1 Installation of the TMADV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002.6.14.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022.7 Rack Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052.7.1 Preparation of the Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072.7.2 Overview of Battery Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092.7.3 Installation of Backup Batteries in Service Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102.7.3.1 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122.7.3.2 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Oerlicon” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152.7.3.3 Install Backup Batteries Type “EnerSys / Hawker” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172.7.4 Inter-Rack Cable Routing (standard Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212.7.4.1 Battery Cabling of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212.7.4.2 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232.7.4.3 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262.7.4.4 Battery Alarm Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292.7.4.5 DC Cabling between the Racks (BS-240 / 240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302.7.4.6 DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322.7.4.7 -48V DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1). . . . . . . . . . . 1332.7.4.8 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . 1342.7.4.9 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . 1352.7.4.10 CAN-Bus Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372.7.4.11 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382.7.5 Inter-Rack Cabling (mixed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412.7.5.1 Battery Cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422.7.5.2 Battery Cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II Racks . . . . . . . . . . 1442.7.5.3 Battery Cabling Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462.7.5.4 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension . . . . . . . . 1472.7.5.5 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension . . . . . . 1482.7.5.6 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502.7.5.7 DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512.7.5.8 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension . . . . . . . . 1532.7.5.9 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension . . . . . . . 1542.7.5.10 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552.7.5.11 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562.7.5.12 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks (mixed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572.7.6 Combination of Racks with different Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582.7.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582.7.7 Installation of Link Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602.7.7.1 Installation of Microwave Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612.7.7.2 Installation of NTPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652.8 Installation of the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682.9 Nonstandard Installation Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702.9.1 Installation of the AC/DC Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702.10 Setup of System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742.10.1 System Cabling with semi-rigid Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752.10.2 System Cabling with Flexi-Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772.10.3 Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 7
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.11 Post Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802.11.1 Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813.1 Installation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813.2 Ancillary Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813.3 Technical Data of BS-240/240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823.4 Configuration Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843.5 Checklist for Base Station Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IllustrationsFig. 1.1 ESD Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 1.2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 1.3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II . . . . 16
Fig. 2.1 Position of the Base Station within the SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 2.2 Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 2.3 Rack types of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 2.4 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 2.5 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 2.6 Types of BS-240 II racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 2.7 Types of BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 2.8 Types of BS-240XL II Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 2.9 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 2.10 Rack mounted on the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 2.11 Dismounting the rack from the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 2.12 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 2.13 Removal of the packing material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 2.14 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 2.15 Unpacking of the battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 2.16 Removal of top cover for crane eye access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 2.17 Opening of rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 2.18 Removal of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 2.19 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 2.20 Space necessary for installation of Base Station rack variants . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 2.21 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fig. 2.22 Floor and wall mounting of the racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 2.23 Earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 2.24 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 2.25 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 2.26 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 2.27 Mounting of Pos. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 2.28 Mounting of stiffening parts (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 2.29 Mounting of stiffening parts (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 2.30 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 2.31 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 2.32 Claws for the front feet before mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 2.33 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 2.34 Back-to-back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 2.35 Side-by-side configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 2.36 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2 . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 2.37 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 2.38 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 2.39 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 2.40 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1Rack . . . . . . . . . . . 51
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 9
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.41 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 Rack . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 2.42 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 2.43 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 2.44 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 2.45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 2.46 Interfaces on the EMI-Panel of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 Rack . 54
Fig. 2.47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 Rack. . . . . . . 55
Fig. 2.48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 2.49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 2.50 Locations of the connectors for external cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 2.51 Ground and AC mains connections (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 2.52 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 Rack) 59
Fig. 2.53 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 2.54 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 2.55 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 2.56 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 2.57 Abis interface PCM0 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 2.58 Abis interface PCM1 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 2.59 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 2.60 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT. . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 2.61 ACTM terminal numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 2.62 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 2.63 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 2.64 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 2.65 Routing of external alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 2.66 Assembly Guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 2.67 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 2.68 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 2.69 Label with terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 2.70 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 2.71 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 2.72 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 2.73 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 2.74 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 2.75 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 2.76 Tools for jumper fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 2.77 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 2.78 Using the trimming tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 2.79 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 2.80 Removal of metal particles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 2.81 Assembly of the connector unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.82 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.83 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.84 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.85 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 2.86 Opening of the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.87 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.88 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.89 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 2.90 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 2.91 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 2.92 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 2.93 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fig. 2.94 TMA with mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fig. 2.95 Example of STMAx and DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 2.96 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 2.97 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 2.98 Contents of the connection kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 2.99 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 2.100 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II) . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 2.101 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 2.102 Paint retouch of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 2.103 Placement of the sealing profile tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 2.104 Parts for battery fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 2.105 Placement of the spacer strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 2.106 Preparation of the battery tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 2.107 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 2.108 Connection of backup battery set “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 2.109 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 2.110 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 2.111 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 2.112 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 2.113 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3 . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 2.114 Placement and connection of the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 2.115 Detail of the connection of battery 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 2.116 Parts of the air vent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 2.117 Routing of the air vent tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 2.118 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 2.119 Terminal blocks for battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 2.120 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 2.121 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 2.122 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 2.123 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 2.124 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fig. 2.125 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 2.126 Battery alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 2.127 Routing of the DC power supply wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 2.128 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 11
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.129 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 2.130 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 2.131 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3) . 132
Fig. 2.132 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1). 133
Fig. 2.133 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) 134
Fig. 2.134 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 135
Fig. 2.135 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 136
Fig. 2.136 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 2.137 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 2.138 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 2.139 SELIC-cabling between the racks BS-240 / 240 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 2.140 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 2.141 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL / 240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 2.142 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 2.143 Example of Battery Cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service Racks142
Fig. 2.144 Example of Battery Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . 144
Fig. 2.145 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 2.146 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 2.147 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1 . . . . . 147
Fig. 2.148 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3) . 148
Fig. 2.149 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1) . 149
Fig. 2.150 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 2.151 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3) 151
Fig. 2.152 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) 152
Fig. 2.153 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1 153
Fig. 2.154 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1154
Fig. 2.155 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . 155
Fig. 2.156 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . 156
Fig. 2.157 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension) . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 2.158 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module . . 159
Fig. 2.159 (View B) Cable connections to Ground and MSU:DC of Extension. . . 159
Fig. 2.160 Mounting Kit for Link Equipment MK:LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 2.161 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 2.162 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 2.163 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II) . 163
Fig. 2.164 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II). . . 163
Fig. 2.165 Overview of microwave cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 2.166 Overview of NTPM cabling variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fig. 2.167 Interfaces on frame F:NT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 2.168 Fixing variants of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 2.169 Handling of the lever mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 2.170 Location of the code key no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 2.171 Components of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fig. 2.172 Fitting of the air flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
12 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.173 Setup of the rubber sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 2.174 Plug-in of the fan cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 2.175 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91 . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 2.176 Connection CAN-BUS and Interconnection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 2.177 Cable Connections at AC/DC frame 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 2.178 Connection of DC and Battery Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 2.179 Routing of the Battery Breaker Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 2.180 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 2.181 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 2.182 Example of system cabling with flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fig. 3.1 Example for Configuration Overview (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 13
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
TablesTab. 2.1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension Racks . . . . 24
Tab. 2.2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 2.3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 2.4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tab. 2.5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tab. 2.6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tab. 2.7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tab. 2.8 Gap between Service1 and Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tab. 2.9 Interrack-cables without extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tab. 2.10 Types of flexible conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tab. 2.11 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Tab. 2.12 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tab. 2.13 Pin Assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 67
Tab. 2.14 Pin Assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 68
Tab. 2.15 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Tab. 2.16 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Tab. 2.17 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X1...X4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tab. 2.18 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X5...X8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab. 2.19 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X9, X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab. 2.20 OPEXAL10V1 Module 0 connection at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tab. 2.21 OPEXAL10V1 Module 1 connection at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tab. 2.22 Pin / Wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female) . . . . . . . . . 81
Tab. 2.23 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tab. 2.24 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tab. 2.25 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tab. 2.26 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tab. 2.27 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tab. 2.28 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tab. 2.29 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tab. 2.30 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tab. 2.31 Pin Assignments of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 2.32 Pin Assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 2.33 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tab. 2.34 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II) . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tab. 2.35 Selection of Slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tab. 2.36 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tab. 2.37 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tab. 2.38 List of temp-resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tab. 2.39 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A withADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tab. 2.40 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tab. 2.41 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)126
14 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Tab. 2.42 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Tab. 2.43 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tab. 2.44 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tab. 2.45 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)132
Tab. 2.46 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)133
Tab. 2.47 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . 134
Tab. 2.48 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 136
Tab. 2.49 Example for CAN-Bus cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Tab. 2.50 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 2.51 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 2.52 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Tab. 2.53 Battery Cable Kits for Connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 Racks . . 143
Tab. 2.54 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tab. 2.55 Battery Cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 Racks .145
Tab. 2.56 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tab. 2.57 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3). . . 148
Tab. 2.58 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . 149
Tab. 2.59 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets). .157
Tab. 2.60 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets) . 157
Tab. 2.61 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units164
Tab. 2.62 Pin Assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tab. 2.63 Pin Assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT . 167
Tab. 2.64 Module HW Code Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tab. 2.65 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tab. 2.66 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tab. 2.67 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, flexible system cable types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tab. 3.1 Technical Data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240XL / 240 XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tab. 3.2 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 15
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
1 Introduction
The applying technical standards are listed in the “Guide to Documentation”(Siemens document number A30808-X3247-K52-*-7635).
1.1 Purpose of the ManualThis document is intended to provide the information necessary for the installation of theBS-240 / BS-240 II and BS-240XL / BS-240XL II in the SBS Base Station System (BSS).
It contains a description of all the necessary steps to install the BTS on site and integrateit into the required infrastructure. The document includes information on the following:– Equipment delivery– Preliminary checks– Unpacking the racks and devices– Rack installation
in addition to information regarding the connection of the base station to:– Power supply– PCM - Network– Site ground system– Receive / transmit antenna system– Alarm connections– Mechanical and electrical connection of the racks
For installation of equipment not supplied by Siemens (battery chargers, antennas, pow-er supplies, microwave etc.) refer to site specific documentation or vendor instructionsprovided with other equipment.
1.2 Installation PrerequisitesIt is required that the installer pays attention to all relevant national EMC standards.– EMF standard relevant for the choice of the antenna, the placement of the antennas
and the max. output power of the BTS (cell coverage).– Use the correct material as described in this manual.– Installation according to the standards EN 50310 or ETS 300253, EN 50154 and the
hints in this manual.– The other equipment on site must be CE designated and must provide interfaces for
connecting of external cables conformable to EMC instructions.
The installation staff should have a basic knowledge of the relevant standards. The in-stallation manual must be available for staff on site.
!Important!The CE declaration of conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the setup and cablingis undertaken in accordance with the specification in the manual and the documentationlisted there, such as mounting instructions, cable lists etc. Where necessary, project-specific documentation should be taken into account.Deviations from the specifications or independent changes during setup, such as use ofcable types with lower screening values, for example, can lead to the CE requirementsbeing violated. In such cases the CE declaration of conformity is invalidated and the re-sponsibility passes to the person who has caused the deviations.
16 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
1.3 Handling of the ModulesAll boards and modules must be handled with extreme care as each one contains elec-trostatically sensitive devices (ESD). The modules are marked with the ESD-label.
Fig. 1.1 ESD Symbol
These are sensitive to static discharge.
Notice:– Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment.– When handling the modules, do not touch connector contacts.– An ground high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules.– Use the socket at the racks for wrist strap connection.– The modules must be transported in appropriate packaging.
Fig. 1.2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL
Fig. 1.3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 17
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2 Base Station Installation
2.1 Position in the SystemThe BS-240/240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II interconnects the MS via the Um interfacewith the trunk network via the Abis interface.
Fig. 2.1 Position of the Base Station within the SBS
2.2 Site RequirementsThe installation site must fulfill installation rules according to ETS 300253 or EN 50310and EN 50174.
The lightning protection measures must be in accordance with IEC 61312, IEC 61024and IEC 61663 (in the future series IEC 62305-3 to IEC 62305-5) to achieve a lightningprotection zone 1 interface to the communication equipment.
With regard to explosion hazards, the installation room of the base transceiver stationwith integral battery back-up system must be guarantee a continuous ventilation, tokeep the critical hydrogen concentration below 4% vol.
The cross section of the air inlet / outlet must be calculated in accordance toIEC/EN50272-2.
The construction of the room in which the base transceiver station is to be housed mustbe complete and the room in good condition and dry (the humidity must not exceed 60%), heaters if necessary, should be placed inside the room.
The BS-240 / 240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II are intended to be installed in an area withrestricted access.
It is important, that the installation site and the transportation route meets the valid floorload requirements. If the floor load rating is unknown, be sure to find out with a buildingengineer or another appropriate professional during the site acquisition.
Prior to the commencement of installation, the site must have been prepared as follows:– The installing room should be free from possible water ingress, frost and excessive
insect attacks.– Doors and windows must already have been installed and must be lockable.
Um
Abis
interface
Asub
interface
A
interface
SBS
BTS BSC TRAU MSC
interface
MobileStation
18 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
– Openings in walls, ceiling or floor - if required - must be complete.– Room lighting and wall outlets must have been installed.– Heating or air-conditioning systems should be ready for operation.– Walls and ceilings should have been painted. The room must be clean.– A minimum floor space of 1,70 m x 1,50 m must be provided
(if later extension is not foreseen).– Cable runways should be installed first.– All installation works of 3 phase 230 V AC power supply, including the circuit break-
ers in the AC-distribution panel (mechanically coupled), must be finished.
To prevent subsequent accumulation of dust and dirt, the parts and equipment units tobe installed should be unpacked outside the room (if possible).
After that it is advantageous to install the BTS, after all other installation works to createthe required infrastructure (power supply, antenna cabling, PCM line...) are complete.
2.3 Site ConfigurationOperation of the BS-240 / 240XL / 240 II / 240XL II requires additional equipment on site:
Fig. 2.2 Site configuration
2.4 Construction Overview of the BS-TypesThe Base Station equipment of the BS-240 / 240 II is housed in racks with the dimen-sions of 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). The Base rack and each optionalExtension rack can be equipped with up to 8 Carrier Units.
The Base rack and the Extension rack of the BS-240XL / 240XL II can be equipped withup to 12 Carrier Units. The dimensions of a BS-240XL / 240 XL II rack are2050 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D).
ground connection
TX/RX antennas
external alarms**
3 x 230V/50Hz AC
PCM24/30 2 Mbit/s
AC-counter/main breakers
microwave outdoor unit *
*dependent on type of network integration**optional
(or -48 V DC)
in power distribution box
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 19
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
For a full-featured Base Station, the maximum number of TRX is limited to 24 with CUsand 48 with the use of FCUs.
The necessary space for installation is shown in Fig. 2.20. Because of the flexible con-figuration, several cable kits will be used for cable connections between the racks.
The first rack of Base Station is called Base rack and contains the following modules:
Generic Modules:
Core Basis (COBA): Essential components are the base core controller (BCC), theadvanced clock generation (ACLK), the carrier unit interfaces (CC-Link), the PCM30/24Abis interfaces, the internal system alarm interface, the LMT interface and an interfaceto one satellite (COSA) to expand the COBA.The priority tasks of the module are the local controlling of the BTSE, the generating ofsystem clocks, providing all interfaces, routing data to the CU and handling and provid-ing O&M messages.
Core Satellite (COSA): The task of the COSA is to expand the number of Abis interfac-es and CC-links of the core. The essential components are the framing and line interface(FALC) that provides the PCM30/24 port, the serial interface controller (SELIC) provid-ing the CU-interface and the BUS-interface to the COBA. The COSA will be controlledvia a satellite interface by the COBA. To apply the feature cross connect, a COSA hasto be installed always into the base rack.
Alarm Collection Terminal (ACT): Collect all alarms for those units having no accessto the CAN-Bus and pass them via CAN-Bus interface to COBA.
Overvoltage Protection and Tracer (OVPT): Protects the PMC30 ports of core boardsfrom overvoltage and provides the monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines.
Abis Connection Module (ABISCON): Provides the interface between the base rackand the peripheral Abis-cables. The ABISCON carries monitoring interfaces for connect-ed Abis-lines and serves as interface for external synchronization clock.
Carrier related Modules :
Carrier Unit (CU): Consists of a receiving and transmitting part with synthesizer andpower amplifier, a signal processing unit as well as a power supply unit.
EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU): CU with supporting EDGE functionality in the up- and downlink.
Flex Carrier Unit (FCU): The FlexCU is a two-carrier unit and based on the ECU. TheFCU allows the expansion of the number of TRX per BTSE up to max. 48.
Antenna Combining Modules:
Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler (DUAMCO): The DUAMCO consists of two identicalmodules. Each module contains a duplex filter, that combines the TX and RX path to-gether, to be fed a common antenna. If more than 2 carriers have to be combined to aantenna system (with DUAMCO 2:2), a DUAMCO 4:2 or DUAMCO 8:2 has to be used.Flexible Duplexer and Multicoupler (FDUAMCO): For each frequency band one typeof the FDUAMCO unit is available, that can be configurated with jumper cables for theOne-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 2.2) or Two-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 4:2). To providea DUAMCO 8:2 functionality, a COAMCO8 is required in addition to theFDUAMCO.
Co-Duplexer and Multicoupler Extension (COAMCO8): The COAMCO8 is used with aFDUAMCO together to provide a 8:2 configuration.
20 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Filter Combiner (FICOM): One base module of the FICOM is needed per cell and isable to combine the TX path of two carriers to one antenna. The base module can beexpanded with up to 3 expansion modules if more than 2 carriers should be combinedto one antenna. The expansion modules is able to combine 2 carriers in addition. Inmaximum 8 carrier, that belongs to the same cell can be combined to one antenna.
DI-Amplifier Multicoupler (DIAMCO): The DIAMCO consists of two independend mod-ules. Every module contains an RX-filter, a low noise amplifier (LNA), an attenuator, asecond LNA and a power splitter. The DIAMCO splits the RX antenna signal and candrive up to 8 receiver inputs. Via the antenna feeder cable the DC power for the towermounted amplifier will be delivered by the DIAMCO.
High Power Duplexer (HPDU): The main task of the HPDU is to combine the TX- andthe RX-path to one antenna, in order to minimize the number of antennas if the FICOMmodule is used.
For the Base Rack to function a Service Rack can be installed close to the Base Rack.If only one Service Rack is located on site, it contains all infrastructure equipment:
AC/DC Converter (ACDC): Converts the AC mains voltage into the -48 Vdc supply volt-age.
Link Equipment (LE): Can be NTPM, if terrestrial line is used for the connection to BSCor microwave units.
Backup Batteries: Guarantees continuous operation for a certain time in case of mainsbreakdown or AC/DC converter failure.
2.4.1 Rack Configuration of different BS-VariantsThe following rack types exist:– Base rack: Contains the core modules, up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240U II) or up
to 12 carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II) and antenna combiners.– Extension rack: Contains up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II) or up to 12 carrier
units (BS240XL / 240XL II) and antenna combiners.– Service1 rack (BS-240 / 240XL): Contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and
link equipment in flexible configuration.– Service1A rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains up to 6 AC/DC converters, an
AC/DC distribution panel with Alarm Collection Terminal, backup batteries and linkequipment in flexible configuration.
– Service2 rack (BS-240 / 240XL): Contains backup batteries and link equipment inflexible configuration.
– Service2 rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains a DC-LE Breaker Panel with AlarmCollection Terminal, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.
The minimum configuration for a BS-240 / 240 II with a maximum of 8 carrier unitsrequires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the caseof -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).
The serving of a site with the maximum number of carrier units (24) requires the Baserack, 2 Extension racks and a Service1 / Service1A rack.
i NOTEAll empty slots in a partially equipped subrack must be closed with cover plates so thatthe air flow inside the rack will not be affected.Cover plates are not necessary for link equipment and empty battery trays.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 21
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
For extension of link equipment or battery backup, additional Service2 racks can be add-ed.
The BS-240 / 240 II site can consists of up to a maximum of 8 racks (Base rack, 2 Ex-tension racks, Service1/Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).
The minimum configuration for a BS-240XL / 240XL II with maximum 12 carrier unitsrequires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the caseof -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).
The serving of a site with the max. number of carrier units (24) requires the Extensionrack. For extension of link equipment or battery backup time, additional Service2 rackscan be added.
The number of Service racks depends on the number of installed carriers on site, thevolume of required link equipment and the expected battery backup time.
The BS-240XL / 240XL II site can consists of a maximum of 7 racks (Base rack, Exten-sion rack, Service1 rack / Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).
2.4.1.1 Rack Configurations BS-240Fig. 2.3 shows the an example of rack types, that are needed for a BS-240 site with upto 16 carriers.
Fig. 2.3 Rack types of the BS-240
LMT
ETHERNETDC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7M
UC
O #
0
MU
CO
#1
CO
BA
0C
OS
A 0
CO
BA
1C
OS
A 1
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7M
UC
O #
0
MU
CO
#1
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
AC/DCCTRL
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
Base Rack Extension RackService1 Rack
22 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.4 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240
Fig. 2.5 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
10 11 12 13 14 15
AC + DC Distribution
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
10 11 12 13 14 15
AC + DC Distribution
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
LE 7LE 8LE 9
LE 10LE 11
LE 6
AC/DCCTRL
AC/DCCTRL
AC/DCCTRL
AC/DCCTRL
AC/DCCTRL
AC/DCCTRL
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
AC/DCCTRL
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
DC-PANELACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 7LE 8LE 9
LE 10LE 11
LE 6
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
LE 7LE 8LE 9
LE 10LE 11
LE 6
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 23
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.4.1.2 Rack Configurations of the BS-240 IIThe site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 II is equal to theBS-240. The rack layouts, are shown in the figure below (example of a 16 carrier site).
Fig. 2.6 Types of BS-240 II racks
2.4.1.3 Rack Configurations for BS-240XLThe following types of rack exist:– Base rack (contains core modules, up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)– Extension rack (contains up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)– Service1 rack (contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and link equipment in
flexible configuration)– Service2 rack (contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configura-
tion)
Refer to Tab. 2.1, Tab. 2.2, Tab. 2.3 for a selection of rack configurations.
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7M
UC
O #
0
MU
CO
#1
CO
BA
0C
OS
A 0
CO
BA
1C
OS
A 1
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7M
UC
O #
0
MU
CO
#1
SIEMENS
Base Rack Extension RackService1A Rack
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08
ACTC0V -48V BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V -48V
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel
0V -48V
LE Panel (S1A)
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LEHU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2 Rack
Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V X29
160A16
0A16
0A
24 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.7 Types of BS-240XL racks
SIEMENSSIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS
FAN #0 FAN #1
FAN #2 FAN #3FAN #2 FAN #3
FAN #4 FAN #5
FAN #6 FAN #7
#0ACOM
#1
ACOMACOMACOM#3#2
CU
#0
CUCUCU
CU CU CU CU
CUCUCUCU#1
#2 #3
#4 #5
#6 #7
#8 #9
#10 #11
CO
BA
#0
CO
SA
#0
CO
BA
#1
CO
SA
#1
LMT
ETHERNET DC-PANELACT-C
DC-PANELACT-C
DC-PANELACT-C
ACOMACOM ACOM ACOM
CU CU CUCU
CU CUCU
CUCU CU CU
DC-PANELACT-C
AC/DC#00
AC/DC#01
AC/DC#02
AC/DC#03
AC/DC#04
AC/DC#05
AC/DC
#00CTRL
AC/DC#10
AC/DC#11
AC/DC#12
AC/DC#13
AC/DC#14
AC/DC#15
AC/DC
#01CTRL
AC + DC DISTRIBUTION
#0
#2 #3
#11#10#5#4
#3#2#1
#8
#0
#9
#7#6#1
CU
FAN #2 FAN #3
FAN #0 FAN #1 FAN #0 FAN #1
FAN #4 FAN #5
FAN #6 FAN #7
LE #0LE #1LE #2LE #3LE #4LE #5LE #6LE #7LE #8LE #9LE #10LE #11
1/4Battery
1/4
1/4 1/41/4
1/4
1/4
1/4Battery
BatteryBattery Battery
Battery
Battery
Battery
Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension Rack
AC + DC DISTRIBUTION
Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)
MU
CO
#2
MU
CO
#3
MU
CO
#1
MU
CO
#0
MU
CO
#3
MU
CO
#2
MU
CO
#0
MU
CO
#1
frame no. installed modules Base Rack installed modules Extension rack
4 (top) 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or4 x FICOM modules(Base/Expansion modules insite specific configuration)
4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or4 x FICOM modules(Base/Expansion modules insite specific configuration)
3 4 x CU or ECU2 x DIAMCO
4 x CU or ECU2 x DIAMCO
2 4 x CU or ECU2 x DIAMCO
4 x CU or ECU2 x DIAMCO
1 (down) 4 x CU or ECU2 x COBA;2 x COSA
4 x CU or ECU
Tab. 2.1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension Racks
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 25
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Service1 rack
frameno.
type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4 type 5
4 (top) F:AC/DC1/12
F:AC/DC1/12
F:AC/DC1/12
F:AC/DC1/12
F:AC/DC1/12
3 F:LE F:LE F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2
2 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:LE F:LE F:BATTERY
1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
DCOutputPower
up to 4000 W up to 8000 W
Tab. 2.2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 Rack
Service2 rack
frame no. type 1(R:BS120)
type 2(R:BS120)
4 (top) F:LE F:LE
3 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY
2 F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
Tab. 2.3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 Rack
26 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.4.1.4 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL IIThe rack layouts of the BS-240XL II are shown in the figure below (example of a24 carrier site).
Fig. 2.8 Types of BS-240XL II Racks
SIEMENSSIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS
#1
ACOMACOMACOM#3#2
CU
#0
CUCUCU
CU CU CU CU
CUCUCUCU#1
#2 #3
#4 #5
#6 #7
#8 #9
#10 #11
AC
OM
#4
AC
OM
#5
CO
BA
#0
CO
SA
#0
CO
BA
#1
CO
SA
#1
ACOMACOM ACOM ACOM
CU CU CUCU
CU CUCU
CUCU CU CU
#0
#2 #3
#11#10#5#4
#3#2#1
#8
#0
#9
#7#6#1
CU
Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack Extension Rack
Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU), EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC ACTC
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#6 FAN#7
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACOM#0
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#6 FAN#7
FAN#0 FAN#1
0V -48V
LE Panel (S1A)
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 6 for LE
HU # 7 for LE
HU # 8 for LE
HU # 9 for LE
HU # 10 for LE
HU # 11 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
FAN#2 FAN#3
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel 180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V X29
160A
160A
160A
160A
or Flex Carrier Unit (FlexCU)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 27
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.5 Equipment Delivery
2.5.1 Preliminary ChecksA ShockwatchTM -label and a TIP (N) TELLTM-label are fixed at the rack surface in thecase of pallet transportation or at the crate for indication of fallover or strong shocks dur-ing the transport from factory to the site.
If the TIP (N) TELLTM-label arrow is blue, the package has been on the side or tippedover in transit. If the ShockwatchTM -label is red, the package has been shocked duringtransport.
Check that the crate and label are proper condition. In case of evident damage due totransport, unpack the equipment in presence of an insurance company representativeand promptly claim any damage and inform the shipper for specifying the damage.Check whether the package is actually addressed to the site and complete.
Fig. 2.9 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label
2.5.2 Rack mounted on a PalletUnpack the rack according to the following instructions and in accordance withFig. 2.10.– Cut the two straps (1).– Cut the protection foil along the cardboard corner reinforcement (2) and remove it.– Remove the cardboard reinforcement on the top and from the corners of the rack.– Unscrew the four fixing claws from the feet of the rack.– Retain the claws for later floor fixing of the rack.– Shift the rack carefully from the transportation pallet. A second person is needed for
help and to prevent the fallover of the rack.
ShockwatchTM -label
TiltwatchTM-label
!WARNINGSafety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps. Pay attention to thetension of the straps. Use only plate shears.
!WARNINGDo not burn the package, as the burning packaging material may give off toxic gases.
28 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).
Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.
Fig. 2.10 Rack mounted on the pallet
Fig. 2.11 Dismounting the rack from the pallet
2.5.3 Rack shipped in a CrateThe racks are shipped vertically in wooden crates (or horizontally in case of transporta-tion by airplane).The crate dimensions for the BS-240 / 240 II are1800 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm (HxWxD). Depending on the pre-installed modules in-side the racks, the crate can weigh up to approx. 190 kg.
The crate dimensions for the BS-240XL / 240XL II are 2225 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm(HxWxD).
The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).
2
1
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 29
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.
All crates have the following information printed on them for identification of delivery:– Customer order number– Serial number of rack or other supplied equipment– Destination– Gross and net weight– Overall dimensions (cm)– Delivery papers
For transportation of the crates from the unloading area into the construction room usehandling aids (for example: fork-lift truck, goods elevator), a second person is neededfor help.
During the unpacking steps, great care must be taken to ensure that the rack is notscratched or damaged in any way. Unpack the rack according to the following figures.
Fig. 2.12 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover
– Cut the three straps (see Fig. 2.12) and remove the 10 M4 screws on the top of thecrate (see Fig. 2.12).
– Remove the crates top cover.– Take out the packing material protecting the rack (see Fig. 2.13).– Remove the protection to the head and to the base of the rack.– Open and remove the tubular PE-wrap protecting the rack (see Fig. 2.14).– Take the rack out of the crate with the aid of the straps around the rack.– Lift the rack in vertical position.
cut
unscrew
!WARNINGSafety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps.Pay attention to the tension of the straps. Use only plate shears.
30 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.13 Removal of the packing material
Fig. 2.14 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack
Immediately after unpacking the rack, inspect it for damage and report the extent of anydamage to the transportation company.
2.5.4 Unpacking of Modules and BatteriesProceed the unpacking of modules as follows:– Open the carton with a suitable knife along the adhesive tape at the top.– Take the PVC foil bag that contain the module out of the carton.– Open the PVC protection bag carefully with the knife and take out the module.
Avoid the handling of the modules in high-static environmental. The packing materialshould be preserved for possible re-packing in future.
The battery sets of the Service1/2 racks will be shipped in wooden crates, including aplastic bag that contain cable sets, screws,washers and the connection plates.
Further the parts of the air vent system and the installation instruction.
cut
!WARNINGThe burning of packing material should be avoided, because packaging may give offtoxic gases.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 31
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.15 Unpacking of the battery sets
– Cut the tension belts with a plate shear.– Remove the top cover of the wooden crate.– Take the batteries out of the crate using the battery handles.
2.5.5 Rack InstallationPrior to the commencement of rack installation, consult the site documentation to locatethe installation point of the Base Station, the PCM24/30 network termination, AC mainsor power supply unit (if -48Vdc will be provided from external equipment) and the accessof the antenna cables into the construction room.
After that check the proper installation of the earthing bar and the necessary cable run-ways.
If the rack must be moved to the final installation position by crane and for later connec-tion works, it is necessary to remove the top cover of the rack.
Proceed as follows:– Open the rack-door and remove both screws in the upper part of the front of rack.
(see Fig. 2.16).– Lift up the top cover and slide it back.– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.
If the racks stand side by side, they must be screwed together to one common unit withone nut and screw M8x20 (part of MK:EMCRV1 for rack variant I or MK:EMCR-2V1 forrack variant II). For this purpose the top cover has to be removed as shown in the figureFig. 2.16.
cut
!WARNINGBefore opening the rack-door take measures to prevent the rack from falling over!Note the accident prevention regulations when working with a fork lift truck or crane!Don‘t remove the crane eyes after the crane transport is finished to guarantee the laterEMI-closeness of the rack!
32 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.16 Removal of top cover for crane eye access
For BS-240 II/ BS-240XL II rack type proceed as follows:– Open the rack-door (see Fig. 2.17): Slide down the protection cover (1), push the
button behind the cover (2) and flap out the handle (3).– Turn the handle counterclockwise 90˚ (4).– Slide the top cover 20 mm in front direction and lift it up (see Fig. 2.18).– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.
Fig. 2.17 Opening of rack door
remove the screws
ground wire
1
2
34
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 33
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.18 Removal of the top cover
Fig. 2.19 Guideline for crane transport
ground wire
1
2
60˚
BS-240 / 240XL
65˚
BS-240 II / 240XL II
34 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.20 Space necessary for installation of Base Station rack variants
!WARNINGThe total weight of rack must not exceed 360 kg (BS-240 / 240 II) or 425 kg (BS-240XL/ 240XL II) respectively when being lifted.For determination the weight refer to section “Technical Data”.Under no circumstances must the sets of batteries be inserted into the Service Racksduring transportation on site. The doors must be kept closed during transportation.
1600
mm
450 mm
2350 mm
1700 mm
min. dimensions for double rack solution
600 mm 450
mm
1900 mm2
02
5 m
m
BS-240XL
BS-240
minimumroom height
min. dimensions for 3-rack solution
Note:
BS-240 without earthquake kit close to wall
BS-240 II / 240XL II: 50 mm (without earthquake kit)BS-240 II / 240XL II with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K4119-X: 150 mm
BS-240 XL with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K2131-X: 400 mm
*) d
ista
nce
to w
all
BS-240XL: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)
750
mm
750
mm
2200 mm
450
mm
*) d
ista
nce
to w
all
**) the distance between two racks, side by side must not exceed 1mm
**) **)
**)
500 mm
BS-240 XL without earthquake mounting kit: 50 mm
*) Minimum clearance rear to wall for:
BS-240 II / 240XL II: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)Minimum clearance by back-to-back assembly for:
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 35
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
The four fastening claws, delivered with the rack, can be used for floor fixing of the racks.
Fig. 2.21 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet
Proceed as described in the list below:– Check the correct vertical rack position, using the spirit level. If the position is incor-
rect, equalize the differences in the floor height by adjusting the rack feet (seeFig. 2.21).
– Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the rack feet (2) for proper floor contact by usingthe adjuster feet wrench.
– Push a claw (3) on each of the 4 rack feet and mark the drilling point on the floor.– Remove the claws and drill the 4 holes and insert the 4 wall plugs (e.g. Fischer
S8GK) into the holes.– Push the claws on the rack feet and fix them.
Alternatively the rack can be fastened to the wall. The rack has two right angle bracketson its top rear for mounting to wall (Fig. 2.22, right side). Depending from the rack type,the necessary minimum distance must be considered from rear of the rack to the wall(see Fig. 2.20). An right dimensioned additional distance piece can be helpful therefor.
i NOTETo prevent the racks from tipping over (product safety) they must be fixed either to a wall(exepted in earthquake zones) or the floor.The minimum distance from the rear of the rack to the wall must be considered. It is rec-ommended to prepare the fixings before moving the rack to its final position.
1 2
3
36 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.22 Floor and wall mounting of the racks
2.5.5.1 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2086-X) proceed in steps as follows:– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Fig. 2.24.– Drill the holes with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the
holes!– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 18x80 M10 I) into the inserting tool (e.g. Fischer
FZE 18) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.– Fit bolts M10 (1) with washer (2) through both holes of claw (3) and distance plate
(4). Drive the bolts into the steel plugs as fast as possible. Fix in this way all clawsfor the rear side rack feeds first.
– Shift the racks to the correct position, so that each of the rear adjuster feet is placedin the cutout of a claw.
– Push a claw on each of the front side feeds and fix them with bolts and washers. Thedistance plates are not needed for the front side row.
!WARNINGIn earthquake zones, the fastening to wall is prohibited. Use the earthquake mountingkit for securing to the floor.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 37
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.23 Earthquake mounting kit
Fig. 2.24 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)
2.5.5.2 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240XLFor setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2131-X) proceed in steps as follows:– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Fig. 2.25.– Drill the holes with 22 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the
holes!– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 22x100 M12I) into the inserting tool (e.g. Fischer
FZE 22) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.
12
3
2 x for rearside of rack 2x for frontside of rack
4
0 50 485
535
600
650
1085
1135
0
463
32,5
Service1 Rack Base Rack
rear
front
38 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.25 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)
– Check the completeness of the mounting kit according to the following figure and re-move the rear panel of the rack.
Fig. 2.26 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL
– Remount the adjuster feet, setup the 4 metal angles (1) and fix them with Allan screw(6) as shown in Fig. 2.27.
rack length 600 mm
rack
dep
th 4
50 m
m
600 mm
423 mm 423 mm
335
mm
57,5
mm
88,5 mm
diameter 22 mm
1
2 2
3 3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5 6
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 39
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.27 Mounting of Pos. 1
– Click spring nuts in the extrusions.– Insert both stiffening parts (2).– Move the stiffening parts to rear and lateral side to stop.
Fig. 2.28 Mounting of stiffening parts (1)
– Slide in the filler plates (3).– Fix each stiffening part with 12 Allan screws M6 (4).
Fig. 2.29 Mounting of stiffening parts (2)
– Fasten the rack to the steel plugs in the floor with 4 bolts M12 (5).
1
16
6
6
6
2
34
extrusion
34
55
6
40 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
– Remove the 4 Allan screws (6). It is absolute necessary, that the edge pieces canwork free of strain in the case of earthquake.
– Mount again the rear panel.
2.5.6 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240 II / 240XL IIIn areas with the possibility of earthquake use the mounting kit for Earthquake Zone 4Rack (MK:EQ4RV2, S30861-K4119-X). The additional brackets improve the robustnessof the rack against earthquake shocks.
The mounting kit consists of the mechanical parts as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.30 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X
Fix the rack to the floor in accordance with Fig. 2.33 in steps as follows:– Mark the positions of the drilling holes onto the floor.– Drill holes at the marked points with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 98 mm. Don‘t
pre-drill the holes!– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.
i NOTEThe use of the earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL requires a minimum clearance tothe wall of 400 mm.
i NOTEFor mounting the earthquake mounting kit in a service rack, first the battery tray has tobe remounted.applying to your system.
!WARNINGTake measures to prevent the rack falling over during the removal of the adjuster feetand mounting of the metal angles. A second person is needed for help! The rack doorstay must be locked in the open position using the door stay provided, whilst work is be-ing performed inside the rack.
1
2
3 3
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 41
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
– Clean out the drilling holes with a vacuum cleaner.– Put dowels (3) (e.g. HILTI - M12*73 / 20) into the drilling holes and hammer them
until the sleeve is flush with surface (use an inserting tool, if available).– Place the double claw (1) at its mounting position and fix it with the provided bolts at
the rear dowels (see Fig. 2.31).– Tighten the bolts to a torque of 60 Nm.– Shift the rack to the appropriate position, so that each of the rear rack feet is placed
in a cut-out of the double claw (Fig. 2.31).– Open the rack door.– Insert a claw (2) on each of the front feet and affix them with the M12 bolts to the
dowels in front of the rack (see Fig. 2.32).– Tighten the connection to a torque of 60 Nm.
Fig. 2.31 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position
Fig. 2.32 Claws for the front feet before mounting
1
3
3
2 2
42 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.33 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit
(sketch without scale, all measures in mm)
465
142.
545
0
57.5
485
600
wall
front side
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 43
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.5.7 Back-to-back AssemblyBack-to-back assembly means all configurations that are not lined up in a connectedrow, but with distance between the sidewalls of racks. These configuration are accord-ing to customer requirements.
The open cable channel for inter-rack cabling from one rack to the other one has to beclosed with an EMI shielded mechanical EMI-kit. In this conduit, the DC-cables, batterycables and the temp.resistor cables will be routed from one rack to the other.
An U-profile bar above the conduit will be used for routing of the Selic-bus-cables andCAN-bus-cable. The mechanical equipment and cables necessary for connecting theracks are part of corresponding mounting kits.
Fig. 2.34 Back-to-back configuration
i NOTEOther configurations with up to 5 m distance are possible and have to be defined forspecific project. In this case additional mechanical support and sleeve equipment aswell as extended cables, described in the following tables, are necessary.
1600
mm
2500 mm
conduitS30861-S2146-S
*)100 mm
*) Minimum clearance for BS-240 II / 240 XL II / 240 XL
750 mm
44 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.35 Side-by-side configuration
Fig. 2.36 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2
max. 5 m
conduitS30861-S2146-S
450
mm
750
mm
profile bar
(Z- clearance of rear to wall, depend on rack type)
Z
conduitS30861-S2146-S
2400
mm
+ 2
x Z
1500
mm
Service1 Base Extension1
Extension2
profile bar
(Z - clearance of rear to wall,depend on rack type)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 45
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.37 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2
Detailed information about the wall distances (Z) of the different Rack types is describedin the chapter 2.5.5 / Fig. 2.20.
Additional to the standard configurations of back-to-back assembly as shown in the fig-ures of this section other configuration with distances up to 5 metres are possible.
In this case required components and extended cables have to be defined in accor-dance to customers requirements depending on length of flexible conduit.
The following tables informs about the mechanical components and typical cables forextension.Measure “X” is the length of the flexible conduit and means also the additionalcable length.
The relation between cables with Siemens code no. and cable no. is given in Tab. 2.9.
conduit
2400
mm
+ 2
x Z
1500
mm
Service1 Base Extension1
Service2
profile bar
S30861-S2147-S
(Z-
clea
ranc
e of
rea
r to
wal
l, de
pend
on
rack
type
)
46 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Service2/3
Service2/2
distance“X”
Service2/1
Service1
Base Extension1
Extension2
S2/1-S2/2 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3 E2-S2/2
DC cable Rack (33)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X
Battery cable Rack (110/3,111/3)+X
(110/4,111/4)+X
Temp.resitorcable
Rack 1)(112/3)
1)(112/4)
conduit Rack 2)
1) max. distance of AC/DC frame 2,5 m otherwise use up to 5 m cable 112/42) type of flexible conduit see Tab.”Types of flexible conduit”
Tab. 2.4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack
Service2/3
Service2/2
Service2/1
Service1
Base Extension1
distance“X”
Extension2
S2/2-E2 S2/1-E2 S1-E2 B-E2 E1-E2
DC cable Rack 1)(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (248)+X
Selic cable Rack 1)(277,278)+X
conduit Rack 2)
1) replace fix installed cable by extended cable (+X)2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Tab. 2.5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 47
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Service2/2
Service2/1
Service1
Base distanceX
Exten-sion
1
Exten-sion
2
S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-E1 S1-E2 B-E1 B-E2
DC cable Rack 1)(35)+X
1)(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (246)+X
Battery cable Rack 1)(277,278)+X
1)(277,278)+X
conduit Rack 2)
1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Tab. 2.6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack
Service2/3
Service2/2
Service2/1
distanceX
Service1
Base Exten-sion
1
Exten-sion
2
S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-S2/1 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3
DC cable Rack 3)(33)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X
Battery cable Rack (110/2+111/2)+X
(110/3+111/3)+X
(110/4+111/4)+X
Temp.resistor cable Rack 1)(112/2)
2)(112/3)
2)(112/3)
conduit Rack 4)
1) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 2,5 m, otherwise use cable 112/32) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 5,5 m, otherwise a special must be defined3) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)4) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Tab. 2.7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack
48 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
The following cables with Siemens code no. are typical cables for interrack-cabling with-out extension.
The cables 33-36 are fix installed in the Service1 rack and have to be replaced by ex-tended according to back-to-back configuration. The installation requires the temporaryremoval of the plate, located at the top of EMI-panel.
Service2/3
Service2/2
Service2/1
Service1
distanceX
Base Exten-sion
1
Exten-sion
2
S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-B S1-E1 S1-E2
DC cable Rack 1)(34)+X
1)(35)+X
1)(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (245)+X (246)+X
conduit Rack 2)
1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Tab. 2.8 Gap between Service1 and Base
cable code no. Siemens code no.
110/2, 111/2 S30864-X211-A47
110/3, 111/3 S30864-X211-A48
110/4, 111/4 S30864-X211-A49
112/2 S30864-X211-A44
112/3 S30864-X211-A45
33 Component of S30864-X211-A29
34 Component of S30864-X211-A29
35 Component of S30864-X211-A29
36 Component of S30864-X211-A29
245 S30864-X210-A11
246 S30864-X210-A12
247 S30864-X210-A13
248 S30864-X210-A14
249 S30864-X210-A15
277 S30864-X210-A2
278 S30864-X210-A2
Tab. 2.9 Interrack-cables without extension
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 49
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
flexible conduit Siemens code no.
type 1 (distance 0,625 m - 2,40 m) C50324-Z200-C22
type 2 (distance 1,25 m - 5,00 m) C50324-Z200-C21
Tab. 2.10 Types of flexible conduit
i NOTEGrounding connections to extended racks are required by separate connections fromexternal grounding bar!
50 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6 External Cabling Activities
2.6.1 OverviewThis chapter provides the information required for installing the external cables betweenthe Base Station and the infrastructure equipment on site.
The rack cannot function without the following cable connections:– In case of an AC power supply: AC mains terminal block 5 pole - power distribution
panel of 230 Vac, 3-phase supply– By using of an DC power supply: DC mains terminal block 2 pole - power distribution
panel of -48Vdc– Ground bolts -> ground bar– Abis interface -> NTPM (in case of transmission via terrestrial lines)– Abis interface -> Microwave indoor units (if W equipment is used for transmission)– Microwave indoor units -> Microwave antennas– Transmit / receive antenna connectors - antenna system– Ground strip of antenna cable shields - ground bar
optional:– Serial interface - signalling link terminal– Alarm collection terminal - external alarm sensors
All interfaces excepted the antenna connectors are located at the EMI panel below thetop rack cover.
For cable installation the top cover has to be removed. For lift-up remove the bolts in thetop extrusions.
Fig. 2.38 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base Rack
ACTM
LPAMSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 VExt.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...4
Serial IF
ground bolts
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 51
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.39 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension Rack
Fig. 2.40 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1Rack
LPA
MSU
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CU 0...3
CU 4...7CAN IN
ground bolts
LPA
MSU
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CAN IN
ground bolts
52 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.41 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 Rack
Fig. 2.42 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base Rack
LPA
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CAN IN
ground bolts
ACTM
LPAMSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 VExt.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3Serial IF
ground bolts
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 53
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.43 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension Rack
Fig. 2.44 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base Rack
LPA
MSU
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CU 4...7
CU 8...11CAN IN
CU 0...3
ground bolts
ACTM
LPA
MSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Serial IF
ground bolts
CAN IN
54 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension Rack
Fig. 2.46 Interfaces on the EMI-Panel of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 Rack
LPA
MSUPE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CAN IN
CU 0...3
CU 4...7
ground bolts
LPA
MSU
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
ground bolts
CAN IN
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 55
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 Rack
Fig. 2.48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base Rack
LPA
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
ground bolts
CAN IN
ACTM
LPA
MSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
Ext.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Serial IF
ground bolts
CAN IN
56 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension Rack
Some additional hints for the installation of external cabling:– The first cable that has to be installed is the ground cable between the main ground
bolt on top of the rack and the nearest ground bar on site.– The second installation step is to connect the ground bolts of the different racks in
series.– After that all other cables e.g. AC mains, RF cabling or alarm wires can be installed.– The screen of the RF jumpers has to be grounded before entering the BTSE via the
cable feeding module, see Fig. 2.88.– If cables are fed through coaxial cable access located at the top of the rack at the
front, the screen has to be grounded like all other coaxial cables.
The following figure shows the location of the external interfaces of the BS-240/240XL(example of BS-240 with Service1-, Base- and Extension rack).
LPA
MSU
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
CU 8...11
CU 0...3
CU 4...7
ground bolts
CAN IN
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 57
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.50 Locations of the connectors for external cables
LMT
ETHERNETDC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7M
UC
O #
0
MU
CO
#1
CO
BA
0C
OS
A 0
CO
BA
1C
OS
A 1
LMT
ETHERNETDC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7M
UC
O #
0
MU
CO
#1
Base rack Extension rackService1 rack
LMT
ETHERNETDC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3LE 4LE 5
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5
AC + DC Distribution
3 x 230 Vac **
antenna cables
serial interface cable
Abis lines (OVPT PCM0, PCM1)
external alarms / commands
ground cable
microwave
-48 Vdc*
*) only used if an external DC-power supply is available
CTRL#0
**) if an external 3 x 230 V ac power supply source will be used
58 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.2 Ground and AC- Power Supply ConnectionsThe racks have to be connected to the site specific ground system before starting theconnection of AC mains cable.
An external ground wire (16 mm2, copper conductor) has to be connected on the upperleft side grounding bolt of the rack which must be attached to the ground bar on site. Alladjoining racks will be grounded using a prefabricated wire bridge and is connected totop left and right corners of each rack respectively.
If on site a main ground wire (50 mm2, copper conductor) is installed, it is possible toconnect each rack on the shortest way to the main ground using 16 mm2 copper wires.
Connect the racks to the ground system as follows:– Use the nearest ground bar on site.– Measure the distances between the connection points of the ground system and the
ground bolt of the rack.– Cut the cables to the required length.– Remove the cable covering at the end to connect to the ground bolt (length approx.
15 mm) and mount the cable lug M8.– Connect the prepared cable end to the ground bolt.– Firmly tighten the nut.
Fig. 2.51 Ground and AC mains connections (example)
The figure above shows the recommended cabling for the power supply and groundconnections. The recommended cable types guarantees the proper function of the basestations, equipped with up to 24 carriers.
3 x 230 Vac mains
AC distributionAC counter3 x 25 A main breakers2)
connection to ground
H07-RN F 5 G41)
ground wire bridges
alternative solution for rack grounding 50 mm2 main ground wire16 mm 2ground wires
1) cross section needed depend on the cable length between
3 x 32 A main breakers3)
external breaker and MSU2) BS-241, BS-240, BS-240XL3) BS-241 II, BS-240 II, BS-240XL II
!WARNINGNote, that the connection by screws at the top of racks standing side by side is a me-chanical connection only. These connection is not a ground connection!
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 59
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
An easily accessible disconnect device is incorporated into the AC mains supply wiring.To isolate the mains supply, a circuit breaker has to be fitted in each phase inside theAC distribution box close to the base station (see Fig. 2.51). The disconnect devicesshall simultaneously interrupt all phase conductors.
A 5-pole terminal block of the MSU, located in the top of Service1 / Service1A rack, isthe connection point for the AC mains cable.
The base station will be powered by 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz, 20 A per phase.
Fig. 2.52 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 Rack)
This warning must appear in the original German text:
Vor Anschluß des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, daß das Kabelspannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeigneteMaßnahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.
An imprint, located on the front panel of the AC frame gives instruction how to deener-gize the base station:
To deenergize entire unit:
1. “Switch OFF BATT 0 + BATT 1(BR14 + BR15) to deenergise DC circuit”2. “Switch OFF breakers (BR11 + BR12 + BR13) to deenergise AC circuit”
To connect the BS240/240XL with the AC mains connection point perform the followingsteps:– Remove the bolts in the top extrusions to loosen the roof.– Lift-up the roof sections carefully, to avoid damages of the paint coat.– Refer to the site documentation for information about type and location of the AC dis-
tribution.– Measure the distance between terminal block of the MSU and AC distribution.
PE L1L2L3 N
60 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
– Cut the cable to the required length.– Make sure that the protection earth wire (PE) is approx. 2 cm longer as the phase
conductors and the N-wire.– Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end, that
is to be connected to the terminal block.– Fix the cable at the strain relief with cable ties.– Insert the wires into the terminals. Use a screwdriver for opening the terminal
springs. Check that all wires are in fixed position.
2.6.3 Ground and DC- Power Supply ConnectionsFor connecting the base station with an external -48 Vdc power supply unit aService1/Sevice1A Rack is not needed.
Depending on the site-specific power supply configuration, the racks have to be con-nected directly with the power supply unit or via a power distribution panel.
The following figure shows the power supply configuration for the BTS, including a pow-er distribution panel.
The power supply unit, as shown in Fig. 2.53, is intended to be supplied by a -48 Vdccentralized battery source. The charging rectifiers must be internally insulated from theAC mains by insulating transformers.
The positive pole of the backup batteries has to be connected to ground.
Fig. 2.53 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC
UE -48 V DC +-
main breaker
power supplyunit
50 A
50 mm2
ground bar
DC main wires
H 07 V-R 16 mm 2
(yellow/green)
ground wire
H 07 V-R 35 mm2
2 x H 07 V-R 16 mm2
backupbatteries battery +0 V pole
connected to ground
DC supply +0 V poleconnected to ground
optionalpower distributionpanel
main ground wire 50 mm2alternative solution for rack grounding
groundwires
2
2 x H 07 V-R 35 mm*)**)***)
80 A
fuse per rack:
**)*)
*) BS-240 / Service2**) BS-240XL / BS-240 II
***) BS-240XL II
100 A ***)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 61
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Installation of the DC wires is as follows:– Measure the distance between rack and the power supply unit or power distribution
panel.– Cut the wires to the required length.– Remove the cable insulation (length approx. 12 mm) at the ends to be connected to
the terminal block of the MSU (the location is shown in Fig. 2.54).– Insert the prepared ends into the terminal block.– Pay attention to the correct polarity of the connection from BTS to the DC output of
the power supply unit.
Fig. 2.54 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240)
For installation of the ground connection proceed as described in section 2.6.2 of thismanual.
-48 V +0 V
62 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.4 Abis-Interface - PCM Link TerminalThe Abis interfaces PCM0 and PCM1, located on the EMI panel, provides the commu-nication links to the neighboring Base Stations or to the controlling BSC.
The Abis interfaces can be terminated with an ABISCON (without Overvoltage Protec-tion for indoor applications) or with an optional Overvoltage Protections (OVPT) whichprotects the boards inside the rack against overvoltage (residual voltage < 1 kV).
Two types of ABISCON/OVPT exist:– ABISCON/OVPT for 120 Ω cables (balanced)– ABISCONCX/OVPTCOAX for 75 Ω cables (coaxial)
Depending on the different cable impedances it is recommended to use:– Screened cable containing 8/10 shielded twisted pairs 0,25 mm2 for 100/120 Ω PCM
lines, e.g. S-09YS(ST)CY 8x2x0.6/1.2.– Coaxial cables for 75 Ω wiring, e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.
The maximum cable length depends on the attenuation of the cable, in order to fulfill therequirements of minimum voltage levels to be provided at Abis interface according toPCM standards.
The cable shielding must be connected to the relevant ground pins as close as possible(in order to avoid EMC/RF interfering effects).
2.6.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm Cable ImpedanceBefore starting the connection of the PCM cables at the Abis interface of the OVPT orthe ABISCON, prepare the cables as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.55 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance
i NOTEIf the connection point for the Abis line (e.g., NTPM or microwave equipment) is outsidethe building where the BTSE is installed, an OVPT module has to be installed always.
i NOTEUse only twisted pair or coaxial copper cables with braided shielding!If cables should be used without shielded twisted pairs, do not route up-link and down-link PCM lines in one common cable.
1 5432
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 63
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
– Cut the cable to the required length (1).– Cut back the outer insulation approx.13 cm (2).– Remove approx. 11 cm of the braided shield (3).– Cut around the outer insulation and shift the insulation ring to the end of the braided
shield (4).Remove the foil shields and the additional plastic wires.– Remove 6 mm of the wires insulation.– Wrap the exposed cable screen, that will be attached at the stress relieving bracket.
Fig. 2.56 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω)
– Fix the cable at the stress-relieving by straps or screw down the screen clamps.– Insert the wires into the terminals of the OVPT / ABISCON.– Insert the additional wire (shielding potential) into one of the ground terminals (e.g.
no. 24).– Lead the additional wire and the uplink and downlink wires on the shortest route
(that means without sleeves) between the stress relieving and the screw terminals.– All unconnected PCM lines (4 wires per line) must be connected to one of the ground
terminals.
The pin assignments of the ABISCON is equal to the pin assignments of the OVPT andshown in the following figures.
i NOTEIf screen-clamps should be used, the outer diameter of the PCM cable must not exceed8 mm. The terminal block of the OVPT/ABISCON allows the connection of wires with across-section range between 0.08 mm2 and 2,5 mm2 (#28 - #12 AWG).
i NOTEThe ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 connectors and monitoring inter-face connectors.Please make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not under mechan-ical tension - use suitable stress relief measures!
64 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.57 Abis interface PCM0 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm
Fig. 2.58 Abis interface PCM1 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B A B A B A AB
B A B A B A AB
PCM 4 PCM 3 PCM 2 PCM 1
Down Link = RX
Up Link = TX
25
26
27
28
EX
T S
YN
C B
EX
T S
YN
C A
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B A B A B A AB
B A B A B A AB
PCM 8 PCM 7 PCM 6 PCM 5
Down Link = RX
Up Link = TX
25
26
27
28
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 65
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.4.2 Abis-Interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 OhmThe Abis interface to the peripheral link equipment is done by use of 9 1,0/2,3 coaxialconnectors, located at the ABISCONCX or at the OVPTCOAX (shown in Fig. 2.59).
Fig. 2.59 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω
For Abis cabling with 75 Ω impedance use coaxial cable e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.
The coaxial cables will be prepared as follows:– Fix a 1,0/2,3-female connector for each PCM-up and down line at the end to be con-
nected to the ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX.– Connect the prepared cable to the matching connectors.– Use a torque spanner for 1,0/2,3 connector (35 Ncm).– Fix the cables at the holes for stress-relieving with cable ties.
holes for stress relieving
PCM lineconnectors
i NOTEThe ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors. Make sure thatthe wires and cables at these connectors are not fixed under mechanical tension - usesuitable stress relief measures!
signal coax connector signal coax connector
PCM1-ULA 1 PCM3-DLA 6
PCM1-DLA 2 PCM4-ULA 7
PCM2-ULA 3 PCM4-DLA 8
PCM2-DLA 4 EXTSYNCA 9
PCM3-ULA 5 --- ---
Tab. 2.11 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω
66 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
signal coax connector signal coax connector
PCM5-ULA 1 PCM7-DLA 6
PCM5-DLA 2 PCM8-ULA 7
PCM6-ULA 3 PCM8-DLA 8
PCM6-DLA 4 --- 9
PCM7-ULA 5 --- ---
Tab. 2.12 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 67
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.4.3 Abis-Interface without ABISCON / OVPTWithout the ABISCON / OVPT, if these function is not needed, a SUB-D25 female con-nector is the direct interface for the PCM links.
i NOTEWithout OVPT no monitoring possibility is provided.
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
1 PCM 1 - ULA PCM Line 1 Up Link A
14 PCM 1 - ULB PCM Line 1 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 1 - DLA PCM Line 1 Down Link A
15 PCM 1 - DLB PCM Line 1 Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 2 - ULA PCM Line 2 Up Link A
16 PCM 2 - ULB PCM Line 2 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 2 - DLA PCM Line 2 Down Link A
17 PCM 2 - DLB PCM Line 2 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 3 - ULA PCM Line 3 Up Link A
19 PCM 3 - ULB PCM Line 3 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 3 - DLA PCM Line 3 Down Link A
20 PCM 3 - DLB PCM Line 3 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 4 - ULA PCM Line 4 Up Link A
21 PCM 4 - ULB PCM Line 4 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 4 - DLA PCM Line 4 Down Link A
22 PCM 4 - DLB PCM Line 4 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 EXTSYNCA
24 EXTSYNCB
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield
Tab. 2.13 Pin Assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector)
68 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
1 PCM 5 - ULA PCM Line 5 Up Link A
14 PCM 5- ULB PCM Line 5 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 5 - DLA PCM Line 5 Down Link A
15 PCM 5 - DLB PCM Line 5Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 6 - ULA PCM Line 6 Up Link A
16 PCM 6 - ULB PCM Line 6 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 6 - DLA PCM Line 6 Down Link A
17 PCM 6 - DLB PCM Line 6 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 7 - ULA PCM Line 7 Up Link A
19 PCM 7 - ULB PCM Line 7 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 7 - DLA PCM Line 7 Down Link A
20 PCM 7 - DLB PCM Line 7 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 8 - ULA PCM Line 8 Up Link A
21 PCM 8 - ULB PCM Line 8 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 8 - DLA PCM Line 8 Down Link A
22 PCM 8 - DLB PCM Line 8 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 ---
24 ---
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield
Tab. 2.14 Pin Assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 69
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.4.4 Monitoring Interfaces of ABISCON and OVPTThe ABISCON / OVPT provides 3 6pin DIN41616 test connectors for monitoring thePCM lines.
The following tables show the pin assignment for the monitoring interfaces. The pin ar-rangement is shown in figure below.
Fig. 2.60 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT
connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name
1- 1 PCM 1 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 3 - ULB
1- 2 PCM 1 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 3 - DLA
1- 3 PCM 1 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 3 - DLB
1- 4 PCM 1 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 4 - ULA
1- 5 PCM 2 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 4 - ULB
1- 6 PCM 2 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 4- DLA
2- 1 PCM 2 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 4- DLB
2- 2 PCM 2 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 3 PCM 3 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB
Tab. 2.15 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0
123456
123456
123456
connector 3
connector 2
connector 1
70 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name
1- 1 PCM 5 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 7 - ULB
1- 2 PCM 5 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 7 - DLA
1- 3 PCM 5 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 7 - DLB
1- 4 PCM 5 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 8 - ULA
1- 5 PCM 6 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 8 - ULB
1- 6 PCM 6 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 8 - DLA
2- 1 PCM 6 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 8 - DLB
2- 2 PCM 6 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 3 PCM 7 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB
Tab. 2.16 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 71
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.5 Alarm Collection Terminal - external Alarm SensorsThe access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection Ter-minal for Base Rack (ACTM).
The ACTM provides 8 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 48 ex-ternal alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-section in the range between 0,08 mm2 and 0,5 mm2 (#28 - #20 AWG).
The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X10, the terminal blocks X1...X8 are used forconnection of external alarm sensors. At the terminal blocks X9 and X10 can be con-nected up to 8 different electrical consumers (e.g. relays). All cables will be attached tothe stress relieving bracket as shown in the figure below.
The following tables give information on the wiring of the terminals.
Fig. 2.61 ACTM terminal numbering
i NOTEFor connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.Remove the outer insulation as shown in Fig. 2.55 for proper ground contact of the ca-ble screen to the stress relieving bracket.
Pin no. Signal nameX1
Signal nameX2
Signal nameX3
Signal nameX4
2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND
1 AL42P AL36P AL30P AL24P
3 AL43P AL37P AL31P AL25P
5 AL44P AL38P AL32P AL26P
7 AL45P AL39P AL33P AL27P
9 AL46P AL40P AL34P AL28P
11 AL47P AL41P AL35P AL29P
Tab. 2.17 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X1...X4
X5X6X7X8
X1X2X3X4
X9
X10
112 12 1121
121
8
1 121 121 12
1
12
1
8
1
72 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
The ACTM provides at the connectors X9 and X10 the possibility to connect up to 8 relaycontacts (e.g. relays with default contact open).
Pin no. Signal nameX5
Signal nameX6
Signal nameX7
Signal nameX8
2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND
1 AL0P AL6P AL12P AL18P
3 AL1P AL7P AL13P AL19P
5 AL2P AL8P AL14P AL20P
7 AL3P AL9P AL15P AL21P
9 AL4P AL10P AL16P AL22P
11 AL5P AL11P AL17P AL23P
Tab. 2.18 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X5...X8
i NOTEThe signal source of the command outputs on the X1...X8 clamping blocks must be aswitching contact. The resistance of the contacts in closed position must be lower than100 Ohm.It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs.The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation ofthe MK:OPEXAL which protects the ACTM against over-voltage.
i NOTEThe switched current must not exceed 100 mAAC/DC (contact closed) and the maximumswitched voltage is limited to 150 VAC or 125 VDC (contact open).The maximum switching power is 10 W.
Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name
1 CMD4_P 1 CMD0_P
2 CMD4_M 2 CMD0_M
3 CMD5_P 3 CMD1_P
4 CMD5_M 4 CMD1_M
5 CMD6_P 5 CMD2_P
6 CMD6_M 6 CMD2_M
7 CMD7_P 7 CMD3_P
8 CMD7_M 8 CMD3_M
Tab. 2.19 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X9, X10
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 73
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.6 Installation of the Mounting Kit OPEXALIf external alarm sensors are placed outside the building, the MK:OPEXAL (OvervoltageProtection for external Alarms) is required.
Each MK:OPEXAL protects up to 10 alarm lines which are connected to the ACTMagainst over-voltage.
Install the MK:OPEXAL in accordance to the following figures.
Fig. 2.62 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL
– Drill two holes with 6 mm in diameter and min. 35 mm depth as shown in Fig. 2.63.– Insert the dowels.– Attach the MK:OPEXAL to the wall in vertical position and fix it with screws and
washers.– Connect the cables coming from the external alarm sensors at the left screw termi-
nals of the overvoltage protectors.– Connect the symmetric pair cables at the right screw terminals of the overvoltage
protectors.– Attach the ground wire to the yellow / green clamping terminal (see Fig. 2.64).– Fix all cables with cable ties at the bracket of the MK:OPEXAL– Route the cables to the ACTM and the ground wire to the PE-plate of the EMI-panel
(see Fig. 2.65).
screw, dowel and washers 6 mm
ground wire
10 symmetric pair
OPEXAL
cables
cable ties
74 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.63 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL
Fig. 2.64 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL
max. 30 mmfrom the rack edge220 mm
700 mm
diameter 6 mmdrill hole depth 35 mm
cables fromexternal alarm sensors
symmetric pair cablesto ACTM
ground wireto PE-plate of EMI panel
Input side Output side
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 75
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.65 Routing of external alarm cables
– Fix external alarm cables with cables ties at the stress relieving bracket, so that aproper electrical contact between the bracket and the cable screens is guaranteed.
– Attach the ground wire to the bolt at the PE-plate.– Connect the external alarm cables at the matching spring terminals of the ACTM.
ground bolt
PE-plate
cable tie
ACTM
stress relieving bracket
76 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the building, theMK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) that protects up to 10 alarmlines is required.
Fig. 2.66 Assembly Guideline
Fix the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1at the wall is as described in section 2.6.6.
To connect the internal and external cables perform the following steps:
1. Attach the inter-connection cable (delivered with the OPEXAL10V1) to the Sub D 25female connector of the OPEXAL10V1.
2. Route the cable to the ACTM module in the EMI-panel of the base rack.3. Secure the cable two times at the stress relieving facilities of the mounting bar.4. Fix the inter-connection cable at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM with cables
ties, so that the ground contact between cable screen and the bracket is provided.5. Remove the plugs of the connection blocks X3 and X4 to connect the OPEXAL10V1
module no. 0 and X1, X2 to connect the (optional) module 1.6. Setup the plugs with the connected wires at the matching blocks.
Fig. 2.67 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1
mounting bar
ground terminal
ground wire to PE-plate
OPEXAL10V1
to ACTM
from external alarm sensors
SubD 25optional
module0module1
(MK:OPEXALBV1)
cables from
S30864-X210-A105
S30864-X210-A105
OPEXAL10V1from module 1
from module 0
X1X2X3X4
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 77
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X4 Pin Plug X3 Pin
1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
Tab. 2.20 OPEXAL10V1 Module 0 connection at ACTM
78 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
The ground pin of the OPEXAL10V1 has to be connected with the ground terminal,mounted on the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1 (see Fig. 2.68).
The pre-fabricated wire will be delivered with the OPEXAL10V1.
Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X2 Pin Plug X1 Pin
1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
Tab. 2.21 OPEXAL10V1 Module 1 connection at ACTM
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 79
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.68 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1
The external alarm sensors will be connected with screened twisted-pair cables at theclamping block of the OPEXAL10V1. The clamping block allows the connection of wireswith a cross section in the range 0,08 - 0,5 mm2. The label of the module gives informa-tion about the terminal assignment of the clamping block.
In addition, the terminal assignment is displayed in the following figure.
Fig. 2.69 Label with terminal assignment
ground pin
clamping block for connectionof external alarm sensors
AL29AL41
AL_
PG
ND
AL_
MA
L_P
GN
DA
L_M
AL_
PG
ND
AL_
MA
L_P
GN
DA
L_M
AL_
PG
ND
AL_
M
AL_
PG
ND
AL_
MA
L_P
GN
DA
L_M
AL_
PG
ND
AL_
MA
L_P
GN
DA
L_M
AL_
PG
ND
AL_
M
AL30AL42
AL31AL43
AL32AL44
AL33AL45
AL36AL24
AL37AL25
AL38AL26
AL39AL27
AL40AL28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
valid alarm no. for module 0
valid alarm no. for module 1
i NOTEDo not lay the IN-and OUT cables in parallel.
80 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.8 External Alarm Protection for ACTM (EAP)If external alarm sensors are placed inside the building and the alarm lines more than30 m long, the External Alarm Protection (EAP) has to be used.
The EAP module will be mounted on the EMI-panel of the rack as shown in Fig. 2.70.A mounting bracket (2) is provided for the fixing the module. In addition the mounting kitMK:HPDURV3 (1) is needed to mount the bracket.
Two prefabricated cables (4, 5) will be used for the connections between the EAP (3)and the ACTM. Both cables are equipped with a SubD 37 female connector at the endthat will be connected at the EAP module and deisolated wire pairs for the connectionat the spring terminals of the ACTM.
One cable is used for transmission of the external alarms, the other one for transmissionof commands.
Two cables (6, 7) with 20 wire pairs each is needed for the connection between the EAPmodule and the site specific alarm distribution panel.
These cables must be prepared on site. The end of each cable that should be connectedat the EAP has to be equipped with a SubD-37 female connector.
The pinning of the SubD-D37 connectors of the prefabricated cables and the color codeof the wire pairs is given in the following tables.
Fig. 2.70 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II
ACTM
LPA
MSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Serial IF
ground bolts
CAN IN
1
2
367
4 5
45
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 81
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Pair No. Color Pin No. Pair No. Color Pin No.
1 white 1 10 red 19
blue 2 grey 20
2 white 3 11 black 21
orange 4 blue 22
3 white 5 12 black 23
green 6 orange 24
4 white 7 13 black 25
brown 8 green 26
5 white 9 14 black 27
grey 10 brown 28
6 red 11 15 black 29
blue 12 grey 30
7 red 13 16 yellow 31
orange 14 blue 32
8 red 15 17 yellow 33
green 16 orange 34
9 red 17 18 yellow 35
brown 18 green 36
Tab. 2.22 Pin / Wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female)
82 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal
1 white X 10 1 10 red X8 11
blue 2 grey 12
2 white 3 11 black X4 1
orange 4 blue 2
3 white 5 12 black 3
green 6 orange 4
4 white 7 13 black 5
brown 8 green 6
5 white X 8 1 14 black 7
grey 2 brown 8
6 red 3 15 black 9
blue X8 4 grey X4 10
7 red 5 16 yellow 11
orange 6 blue 12
8 red 7 17 yellow X 3 1
green 8 orange 2
9 red 9 18 yellow 3
brown 10 green 4
Tab. 2.23 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 83
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal
1 white X 9 1 10 red X5 11
blue 2 grey 12
2 white 3 11 black X6 1
orange X9 4 blue X6 2
3 white 5 12 black 3
green 6 orange 4
4 white 7 13 black 5
brown 8 green 6
5 white X5 1 14 black 7
grey 2 brown 8
6 red 3 15 black 9
blue 4 grey 10
7 red 5 16 yellow 11
orange 6 blue 12
8 red 7 17 yellow X 7 1
green 8 orange 2
9 red 9 18 yellow 3
brown 10 green 4
Tab. 2.24 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM
84 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.9 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC - internal Alarms / DC SupplyThe ACTC is used as a connection board to support single connectors for the internalalarms (FAN, heat exchanger, temperature sensor, rack in service...) and the DC supplyfor the FANs, heat exchangers, microwave equipment and smoke sensor.
The ACTC is located in the DC panel of each rack (see Fig. 2.71).
Fig. 2.71 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240)
The following tables provides information about the connecting of internal alarm sensorsat the ACTC.
24 1
X36X35X34
X19X18X17
X30X29X28
X33X32X31 X37
X38 X39 X40
X1 X2X26
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 85
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
7 2) Front side X17, X26 / 11,12 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Front side X18, X26 / 9,10 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...36, X26 / 1, 2(all connected in parallel)
Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
Notes:1) “High Active” if OVP is installed2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Tab. 2.25 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL)
86 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.72 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL)
24 1
X36X35X34
X19X18X17
X30X29X28
X33X32X31 X37
X38 X39 X40 X42
X1 X2X26
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
5 Rear side X43 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (not installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X44 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (not installed) (High Active)
93) Front side X17-X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40, X42 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...X36, X26 / 1, 2(all connected in parallel)
Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Tab. 2.26 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 87
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.10 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-3 - internal Alarms / DC SupplyThe ACTC-3 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 II / 240XL II. The board is locatedin the DC panel of Base- and Extension rack, AD-panel of Service1A rack and in the LE-panel of the Service2 rack.
Fig. 2.73 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3
124
X37 X48X45
X20
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 2) Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 2) Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
7 2) Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Front side X45 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front sideGeneral: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Tab. 2.27 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II
88 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 2) Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
6 2) Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
7 2) Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (High Active)
8 2) Rear side X44, Front side X45 / 15,16 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (High Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front sideGeneral: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Tab. 2.28 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 89
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.11 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-4 - internal Alarms / DC SupplyThe ACTC-4 collects all internal alarms of the BS-24o II and BS-240XL II racks and islocated at the DC panel of the Base- and Extension racks, AD-panel of each Service1Arack and at the LE-panel of Service2 rack.
Fig. 2.74 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4
The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensorsat the ACTC-4 for BS-240 II.
124X2 X3X1 X4
LMU Smoke RDO
90 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3, ..., Rack 7
0 Front side X3 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Top of PCB X12, Front side X4/ 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA9)
5 2) Top of PCB X15, Front side X4 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA10)
6 2) Top of PCB X11, Front side X4 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA11)
7 2) Top of PCB X14, Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Top of PCB X10, Front side X4 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) (MBR) 5)
10 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) (BBR) 5)
11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE)(High / low Active)
Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low Active)
12 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 7, 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6) (MAJ) 5)
13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4/ 5,6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High / low Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active)
14 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) (BCHF) 5)
15 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) (48OTB) 5)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicatedconnector at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connectorat the ACTC front, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link toAC7DC, 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet, 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not avail-able, if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected), General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevantsyntax
Tab. 2.29 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 91
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
The spring terminal block of the ACTC allows the connection of wires in a diameterrange of 0.08 mm2... 0.5 mm2
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2
Rack 0, 1 Rack 4, ..., Rack 7
0 Front side X3 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Top of PCB X12, Front side X4 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA9)
5 2) Top of PCB X15, Front side X4 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA10)
6 2) Top of PCB X11, Front side X4 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA11)
7 2) Top of PCB X14, Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Top of PCB X10, Front side X4 / 15,16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) (MBR) 5)
10 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) (BBR) 5)
11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE)(High / low Active)
Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low Active)
12 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 7, 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6) (MAJ) 5)
13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active)
14 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) (BCHF) 5)
15 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) (48OTB) 5)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicatedconnector at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connectorat the ACTC front, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link toAC7DC, 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet, 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not avail-able, if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected), General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevantsyntax
Tab. 2.30 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks
i NOTEIt is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connectedto the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise fromexternal to internal signal ground.maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mAminimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhmIf a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm Low"-resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm.
92 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.12 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) InterfaceA SubD 15 female connector and the RJ45 socket, located at the DC panel of the Baserack, is the interface for connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for commis-sioning and maintenance purposes.
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
1 --- 6 LMT_SA 11 LMT_RB
2 LMT_TA 7 --- 12 LMT_IB
3 LMT_CA 8 GND 13 LMT_SB
4 LMT_RA 9 GND 14 ---
5 LMT_IA 10 LMT_TB 15 ---
Tab. 2.31 Pin Assignments of the LMT interface
RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name
1 10BT_TD+ 2 10BT_TD-
3 10BT_RD+ 4 ---
5 --- 6 10BT_RD-
7 --- 8 ---
Tab. 2.32 Pin Assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 93
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.13 Antenna ConnectionsThe BTSE has to be connected to the transmit and receive antennas. The antenna con-figuration and the required cabling are dependent on the site and the type of combining.For detailed information refer to the site-specific documentation or use the correspond-ing customer documents.
For installation and service purposes it is useful to know, which hardware is connectedto which cell. The numbering, seen from the top of the antenna pole, starts at an azimuthangle of 0˚ (north) and rotates clockwise.The first existing cell whose beam centre line lies at 0˚ or more is defined as cell 0 orsector 0. The next one following in the same direction cell is cell 1 etc.
In case of omni cell the cell no. is 0.
Fig. 2.75 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole)
For detailed antenna configuration, refer to the site-specific documentation.
2.6.13.1 Preparation of Antenna Jumper CablesShort jumper cables with a max. diameter 1/2” have to be used for connections betweenthe antenna cables and the front connectors of the combining modules, because thethick cables from the antenna are not able to enter the racks.
With regard to the overvoltage protection, it is recommended to ground the outer con-ductor of antenna feeder cables where they are connected with the jumper cables out-side the BTSE.
sector width 120˚
sector angle
directional antenna
pole
sector 0
sector 1
sector 2
N
0˚
beam centre line
94 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
These jumper cables must be fabricated of 1/2” highly flexible coaxial cable on-site, if nopre-fabricated cables should be used.
Fabricate the jumper cables in steps as shown in the following figures.
Fig. 2.76 Tools for jumper fabrication
Fig. 2.77 Parts of the connector unit kit (example)
– Measure the distance between the end of the antenna feeder cable and the frontconnectors of the combining modules.
– Cut the cable to the required length. Do not deform cable outer conductor, by usingtoo much pressure during the cutting process!
hot air gun(or propane/ butane blow torch)
cable trimming tool
cable knife
open-ended spanners(jaw opening 21mm and25 mm)
connector head
corrugation nut
fitting ring
emery paper
cleaning tissue
heat protection tape
heat shrink sleeve
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 95
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.78 Using the trimming tool
Fig. 2.79 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor
Fig. 2.80 Removal of metal particles
1
2
rotate clockwise
heat shrink sleeve
fitting ring
96 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.81 Assembly of the connector unit
Fig. 2.82 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation
Fig. 2.83 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve
corrugation nut
fitting ring
connector head
20 mm
heat protection tape
heat shrink sleeve
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 97
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.84 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape
The jumper cables must be routed through the cable feeding module forward to the7/16” front connectors of DUAMCO/FICOM and to N-type male connector of DIAMCO.
Fig. 2.85 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors
Connect the antenna cables to the combining equipment as follows:– Unscrew the front part of the cable feeding module.– Route the antenna jumpers to the rack, which has to be connected.– For grounding remove outer insulation approx. 60 mm for proper contact with the
metal lids of the cable feeding module (see Fig. 2.88).– Feed the jumpers through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors
of antenna combiners.– Fix the jumpers at the connectors TX/RX of combiners.
remove extra lengthof heat protection tape
hot air stream
i NOTEFix the jumper cables at 7/16 connectors with a torque wrench set to 25 Nm.N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight". There doesn't appear to be a con-sensus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector suppliers recommends a torqueof approx. 1,00 Nm.
i NOTENote that being able to close the doors means that the depth of the right angle connectoris not allowed to exceed 45 mm.
max. 45 mm
max. 1/2” jumper cablewidth across flats 32
98 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
– Bend the jumpers into the correct position for easy closing of cable feeding module.– Screw the front part of the cable feeding module in its original position.
Fig. 2.86 Opening of the cable feeding module
Fig. 2.87 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module
Fig. 2.88 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 99
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.6.14 Installation of the Tower Mounted AmplifierA Tower Mounted Amplifier will be used to reach a BTS sensitivity better than GSM re-quirements at the antenna connector and to compensate a high antenna cable loss.
The TMA should placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be supplied and su-pervised by the multicoupling equipment (DIAMCO or DUAMCO) in the rack it is con-nected to.
When using a DUAMCO as antenna combiner inside the rack, only one feeder cable isneeded between the TMA and the BTS (for both TX and RX signals) due to full duplexarchitecture of the TMA.
Fig. 2.89 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used)
If a FICOM as antenna combiner inside the rack, the TMA is used in conjunction with aDIAMCO and it only amplifies the overall BTS uplink signal.
Fig. 2.90 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used)
If a TMA used together with HPDU, a DUBIAS is required for powering and signalling ofthe TMA.The configuration is shown in figure below and the installation in Fig. 2.91
Base Rack
DUAMCO CU
TMATMA
TMA TMA
Base Rack
DIAMCO CU
FICOM
100 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.91 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA
Fig. 2.92 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS
2.6.14.1 Installation of the TMADV1Two 7/16 female connectors, located at the bottom of the TMADV1 (lettered ANT andBTS) are the interfaces for connection of the 1/2” antenna jumper cables that connectthe TMADV1 with the antenna and the antenna feeder cable towards to the BTS.
The TMA can be pole-or wall mounted in vertical position only.
The location of the external interfaces is shown in Fig. 2.93.
The mounting of the TMA may be done as follows in accordance with Fig. 2.94.– While still on ground, join each of the 2 brackets with one screw M8, but leave the
brackets open. Be sure not to loose the remaining 2 screws.– Position the TMA on the mast/pole and tighten the remaining 2 screws.– Connect the TMADV1 with the jumper cables to the antenna feeder cable and the
antenna. Do not forget to consider thermal dimensional changes of the antennafeeder cable.
– Attach the ground wire to the ground screw of the TMADV1 and connect the wire atnearest grounding facility at the mast or pole. The ground wires eyes must have theright size for the TMA‘s M8 ground screw and the cable should be have a cross sec-tion not less than 16 mm2.
TMA TMA
DIAMCO
FICOMHPDUDUBIAS
RX1RX2
RX8
CU1CU2
CU8
FICOMFrom
RXIN
BIASPATH
TMAto
DIAMCO
ANT1ANT0HPDU2
DIAMCO
RXOUT
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 101
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.93 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA)
Fig. 2.94 TMA with mounting brackets
The TMADV1 may be also mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws (not suppliedwith the TMADV1)
The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The properway of mounting the TMA on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can onlybe decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself does probably notprovide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.
ANT(input/outputtowards TX/RX antenna)
(input/outputtowards BTS)
BTS
grounding point
i NOTENote, that the max. diameter of the mast do not exceed 140 mm, if the fixing material willbe used as shown in the following figure.
!WARNINGIt is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding cable to theTMA‘s grounding point. Pay attention to the thermals dimensional changes of the anten-na feeder cable.
102 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.6.14.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAxThe Single Tower Mounted Amplifiers (STMAx) and the Dual Tower Mounted Amplifiers(DTMAx) are the RF units that provide the means to feed the downlink signal to oneTX/RX antenna and to amplify, with low noise figure, the uplink signal coming from thesame TX/RX antenna.
The DTMAx / STMAx should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will besupplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is connected to.
Various versions for different frequency bands of the DTMA and DTMARET are avail-able.
Fig. 2.95 Example of STMAx and DTMAx
Fig. 2.96 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example)
The DTMAx and the STMAx provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection withthe BTSE (lettered COM) and the antenna (lettered ANT).
Single Tower Mounted Amplifier Dual Tower Mounted Amplifier
Single Tower Mounted Amplifier Dual Tower Mounted Amplifier
i NOTEIt is recommended to mount the DTMAx and the STMAx at pole or wall in a vertical po-sition, so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) possi-ble, it depends on the environmental conditions.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 103
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Each DTMAx / STMAx shall be grounded to the pole, therefore a grounding wire has tobe prepared for each device on site.
The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threadedhole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have theright size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not lessthan 16 mm2.
The other end of the grounding wire should be safely connected to a well grounded pointon the pole.
Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of themounting plate (see rear view of the devices). This is the situation just before tighteningthe hose clips.
Fig. 2.97 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx (
For the mounting, the following steps can generally be recommended:
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten (see Fig. 2.97).5. Remove the tensioning belt.6. Connect the DTMAx / STMAx via a 1/2” jumper cable to the antenna feeder cable
(connector COM) and to the antenna jumper cable (connector ANT). The torquemust be 25 - 30 Nm.
7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors isrecommended.
The DTMAx / STMAx may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dow-els (not supplied with the device).
hose clips
tighten
tighten
104 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The properway of mounting the device on a wall varies from case to case. The best method canonly be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself probably doesnot provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.
i NOTEIt is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding wire to theSTMAx / DTMAx nearest grounding point. The cross section of the ground wires shouldbe not less than 16 mm2.
i NOTEPay attention to the thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cables.
!WARNINGPay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work withoutfall protection equipment.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 105
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7 Rack CompletionThe BS-240 / 240XL / 240 II / 240XL II racks are shipped including equipment compo-nents, pre-installed by the manufacturer in accordance with customer configuration:– Sub-rack, which holds several boards and modules– DC panel– Backplanes (multi-layer PC-boards, which are mounted at the rear side of the sub-
rack) and internal cabling– Heaters and fan units– Core modules and carrier related modules– AC/DC converters– Semi-rigid cables for setup of the system cabling
The following items are planned for installation after setup of the racks on site:– Backup batteries– Cabling between the racks (e.g. battery cabling, DC-cabling, CAN-BUS)– Link equipment
For cable routing from one rack into another one two ways can be used. The CAN-Buscables and the SELIC-Bus cables will be routed above the EMI panels.
Without leaving the EMC-protected area (e.g. DC power supply, battery cables), an in-terconnection hole in upper area of the side walls of each rack is provided. The holesare covered by plates for single racks and the end-racks of a row.
The two mounting kits EMC as shown in the following figure contain all of the parts thatare needed for connection of two racks.
Fig. 2.98 Contents of the connection kits
Mount the parts of the connection kits in the following order:– Loosen the security screws M3 of the cover part (Fig. 2.99) or break out the pre-
perforated part of the appropriate side wall (Fig. 2.100).– BS-240 / 240XL: Setup the 8 sealing stripes (1) at the edges of the holes of both
adjoined racks. Move the racks close together.– BS-240 II / 240XL II: Move at first the adjoining racks close together. Push the 4 con-
tact springs (2) over the adjacent edges of both racks.
12
3
4
3
4
MK:EMCRV1 (BS-240 / 240XL) MK:EMCR-2V1 (BS-240 II / 240XL II)
1) sealing stripes 2) Contact springs
106 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
– Connect the racks to one common unit with nut and screw M8x20 (3) and install theground wire (4) between the ground bolts of both racks (Fig. 2.101).
Fig. 2.99 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL)
Fig. 2.100 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II)
unscrew the 10 screws M3
1
2
2
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 107
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.101 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240)
2.7.1 Preparation of the Top CoverBefore starting the connection of external cables, prepare the top cover for later routingthe cables through the cover to the infrastructure equipment on site.
For this purpose the top cover provides removable pieces as shown in the figure below.
The required number of pieces can be removed in easy manner by breaking out at theperforation. After that refinish the paint coat at all cracks with the paint retouch kit (Sie-mens Serial No. A500-C101-B261).
The sharp edges of the break-outs will be covered with the sealing profile tape (SiemensSerial No. C42127-Z1-C661). It will be delivered in 100 cm sections and must be cuttedin the required length.
Fig. 2.102 Paint retouch of the top cover
3
4
108 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.103 Placement of the sealing profile tapes
sealing profile tape
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 109
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.2 Overview of Battery SetsTo enable easier transportation and setup of Service Racks, they can be delivered with-out backup batteries. The battery tray can be equipped with different types of batteries.The installed battery type depends on the required backup time. Each battery set consistof 4 batteries. If a label relevant to the characteristics of the batteries is delivered, thenshould be this label placed on the door of the rack.
The following battery types can be installed in the first generation of BS-240 / 240XL.
Tab. 2.34 shows the battery types, which can be installed in the racks of BS-240 II andBS-240XL II.
Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity
Excide, A400/85 BATTPACKV1 MK:BATTPACKV1 85 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP80 BATTPACKV2 MK:BATTPACKV2 80 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP100/19” BATTPACKV3 MK:BATTPACKV3 100 Ah
EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah
Tab. 2.33 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL)
Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity
EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV5 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV7 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah
Tab. 2.34 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II)
110 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.3 Installation of Backup Batteries in Service Rack
If the Service1A / Service2 racks are equipped with battery trays MK:BATTFIXCB, be-fore setup of the batteries, the spacer strips (1) have to be placed at the rear and thefront edge of the battery tray. Additional spacer blocks (2) are used to provide a distanceof 10 mm between the batteries. They will be fixed at the batteries as shown in the figurebelow.
Fig. 2.104 Parts for battery fixing
i NOTEBS-240 / 240 XL: As up to 2 AC/DC frames can be installed in the Service1 rack. Anidentification of the AC/DC controllers is needed. The first AC/DC frame is installed inthe upper position.Dip switches at the front of the AC/DC controller are used for selecting the Slot ID. Thefollowing combinations are not permitted: Slot ID bit 0/1 = “ON/ON” or “OFF/OFF”. Thecapacity of the installed battery systems has to be selected at the Dip switch rows of theAC/DC controller. For detailed information refer to ITMN:BTSE.
Slot ID bit 0 Slot ID bit 1
upper frame (AC/DC 1) ON OFF
lower frame (AC/DC 2), if installed OFF ON
Tab. 2.35 Selection of Slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL)
i NOTEIn a BS-240XL / XL II Service2 rack the extra space must not be used for a fourth set ofbatteries.
1
2
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 111
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.105 Placement of the spacer strips
The bracket that fix the batteries inside the battery tray has to be removed, before setupof the battery set.
A second variant of the battery tray will be equipped with fixing plates to provide spacebetween the batteries. Proceed in accordance with the following figure:– Remove the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray before fitting of the batteries.– Mount the battery fixing plates at the bottom section of the battery tray.
Fig. 2.106 Preparation of the battery tray
bracket
spacer strips
loosen the screws
MK:BATTERY fixing plate
112 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.3.1 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Excide”Install and connect the backup batteries “Excide” (formerly “Sonnenschein”) in accor-dance with Fig. 2.107 and Fig. 2.108 in the following steps:– Switch OFF the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) and at
mounting kit battery (Service2).– Put on the battery 2 and 3 into the battery tray.– Connect the short cable with battery 2 (- terminal) and battery 3 (+ terminal).– Connect one of the long cables at battery 2 (+ terminal) and battery 3 (- terminal)– Move battery 2 and 3 as far as stop to the rear side of the battery tray.– Put on battery 1 and 4 into the tray.– Connect the long cable coming from battery 2 (+ terminal) at battery 1 (- terminal)
and the long cable coming from battery3 (- terminal) at battery 4 (+ terminal).– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 4 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and the
tempresistorcable to battery 1 (+ terminal).– Fasten the battery nuts to a torque of 20 Nm. Close and tighten both velcro straps.– Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during fasten the cables to the battery
terminals (avoid contact of metal).
Fig. 2.107 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”
!WARNINGOnly use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order toavoid accidental short circuits.
battery2
battery 1
battery3
battery 4
velcro straps
air vent tubes
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 113
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.108 Connection of backup battery set “Excide”
Setup the battery air vent system in accordance with the figure in steps as follows:– Setup a plastic angle (1) at the air outlet of each battery.– Fix one of the 4 clear plastic tubes (2) at each angle.– Connect the tubes of battery 2 and 3 with the T-connector (3).– Connect the tubes of battery 1 and 4 with cross-connector (4).– Setup the connection between the T-connector and the cross-connector. Use the
short plastic tube (5).– Connect the long clear plastic tube (6) at the cross-connector.– Equip the other end of the tube with the outlet nipple (7).– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards to the cable feeding module.– The outlet part will be placed inside the cable feeding module.– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.
The second T-connector (8) will be used for connecting the air vent system of a secondbattery tray.
+ +
++
1
2 3
4
- 48 V (blue)+ 0 V (black)
tempresistor cable(color as shown not relevant)
air vent tube, routed via RF cable entry outside the rack
i NOTEIn order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in verticaldirection.
114 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.109 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide”
Fig. 2.110 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
1 1
1
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 115
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.3.2 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Oerlicon”For installation of an “Oerlicon” battery set proceed in accordance with Fig. 2.111 andFig. 2.112 in steps as follows:– Switch off the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or of ADP
(BS-240 II / 240 XL II - Service1A) and mounting kit battery (Service1A / Service2).– Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.– Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short met-
al bridge.– Connect the following batteries in the same way.– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).– Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque with 6 Nm.– Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque with 20 Nm.
After all electrical connections are complete, setup the air vent system:– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2 and 3.– Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipples of battery 1 and 4.– Connect the 4 tubes at the collector part (3).– Connect the long clear plastic tube (4) at the collector part.– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards through the cable feeding
module.– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.
i NOTETurn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the batteryterminals (avoid contact of metal). The battery capacity must be adjusted at the AC/DC(BS-240 / 240 XL) controller.
!WARNINGOnly use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order toavoid accidental short circuits.
i NOTEIn order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in verticaldirection.
116 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.111 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon)
Fig. 2.112 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set
1 2 3 4
Temp-resistor cable
battery cable -48 V
battery cable +0V
air vent system
++
++_
__
_
1
2
3
4
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 117
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.3.3 Install Backup Batteries Type “EnerSys / Hawker”Before starting the installation of the battery sets switch “OFF” the circuit breaker at theframe AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or at the AD-panel (BS-240 II/240 XL II- Service1A).
Fig. 2.113 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3
Install and connect the “EnerSys” batteries (formerly “Hawker”) according to Fig. 2.114and Fig. 2.118 as well as the following steps:– Place batteries 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.– Mount the MK:BATTERY in its original position.– Connect the battery 1 (+ terminal) and battery 2 (- terminal) with the short metal
bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm.– Connect the following batteries in the same way.– Fasten the accompanying protecting caps over the battery terminals.– Remove the protection cover of the MK:BATTERY.– Connect the blue load cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and connect the black load cable
and the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).– Using a wrench set to a torque of 5 Nm, fasten the battery cable nuts.– Shift the protection caps of both battery cables to the end position to covering of the
battery poles.
Fig. 2.114 Placement and connection of the batteries
switch OFF
bracket
1 2 3 4
+_
118 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.115 Detail of the connection of battery 4
After all of the electrical connections are complete, install the air vent system of the bat-tery set. It consist of 2,00 m plastic tube and 3 T-collectors. The plastic tube has to becutted into pieces with the length as shown in Fig. 2.116:
tempresistor cable
distance piece
“+” pole cable to MK:BATTERY
battery 4
metal bridge
!WARNINGUse only insulated tools to connect the cables to the battery nuts to avoid accidentalshort circuits!
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 119
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.116 Parts of the air vent system
– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) to the air vent connectors of batteries 2,3 and 4.– Fix the plastic tube (2) at the air vent connector of battery 1.– Connect the a T-collector part (3) at the tubes of battery 2,3 and 4.– Attach tube (2) of battery 1 to the T-collector of battery 2.– Connect the T-collectors of battery 2 - 3 and 3 - 4 with the 100 mm tubes (4).– Connect the pre-installed plastic tube that is routed to the gas outlet of the rack at
the T-collector of battery 4. Fix the tube at the rack frame with cable ties.
Fig. 2.117 Routing of the air vent tubes
170 mm
100 mm
70 mm
2
1
3
4
1
23
4
3 3
120 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
The MK:BATTERY has to be connected with the DC input terminals of the AD-panel.The pre-fabricated cables have to be attached to the “+” pole and the“-” pole of theMK:BATTERY.Fix the cables at the mounting bars with cable ties as shown in the figurebelow.
Fig. 2.118 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection
+
+
_
_
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 121
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.4 Inter-Rack Cable Routing (standard Configuration)This chapter provides information about the cable connections from one rack to another,dependent on the BS-240 / 240XL or BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types and configurations.
2.7.4.1 Battery Cabling of BS-240 / 240XLAn overview of the battery interrack cabling for BS-240 and BS-240XL is provided in thetables below.
batterysystem
batterycable no.
from to length color
BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-26b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1500 mm blue
111/1 S1-AC/DC1-25b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1500 mm black
BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 2850 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 2850 mm black
BAT 2 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 3700 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 3700 mm black
BAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4200 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4200 mm black
Tab. 2.36 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240)
i NOTENote: If the Service1 rack is equipped with two frames AC/DC (1 and 2) and only BAT0and BAT1 should be connected to the AC/DC frames, connect BAT0 with F:AC/DC1and BAT1 with F:AC/DC2.
batterysystem
batterycable no.
from to length color
BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-20b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1750 mm blue
111/1 S1-AC/DC1-19b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1750 mm black
BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-22b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 3300 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-21b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 3300 mm black
BAT 2 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 4200 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 4200 mm black
BAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4700 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4700 mm black
Tab. 2.37 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL)
122 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.119 Terminal blocks for battery cables
Fig. 2.120 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL
batterysystem
temp-resistor-cableno.
from to length
BAT 0 112/1 S1/BAT0 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T0 2500 mm
BAT 1 112/2 S2/1 BAT1 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T1 2500 mm
BAT 2 112/3 S2/2 BAT2 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T0 5500 mm
BAT 3 112/4 S2/3 BAT3 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T1 5500 mm
Tab. 2.38 List of temp-resistor cables
T0
T1
25 26 27 28
a a aa
bbbb
+ +- -BAT0 BAT1
terminal blockAC/DC1 frame
T0
T1
14 15 16 17
a a aa
bbbb
+ +- -BAT2 BAT3
terminal blockAC/DC2 frame
a b c12
terminal block battery frame
0 V
-48 V
ϑ ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
frame AC/DC 1
T1 T0
frame AC/DC 2
T1 T0
112/4
110/4111/4
112/3110/3111/3
112/2110/2111/2 110/1
111/1
112/1
BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BAT0
top cover air vent air vent air vent air vent
temp-resistor
cable
Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service2/1 Service1
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 123
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.4.2 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)An overview of battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with the ADpanel variant ADPAV3 is shown in the following table.
CableNo
From To Color Lengthm
Factory No.S30861-*
418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70
418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70
418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70
418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70
419 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 2,71 X215-A71
419 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 2,71
422 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 1,71
422 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 1,71
422 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 black 1,71
423 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
423 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
423 /1 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 *2) blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
140 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 blue 1,00 X216-A74
140 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0,60
140 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 blue 1,00 X216-A74
140 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0,60
141 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) blue 0,60
141 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0,40
*1) If required, adapt or shorten the cable length*2) Only in case of XL-Rack: use the longer cable 423 instead the cable 422.
Tab. 2.39 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3)
124 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.121 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
CableNo
Signal Name From To Factory No.S30864-*
53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,(+0V) *1)
X216-A92
*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no batteryinstalled, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.
Tab. 2.40 Battery sensor cabling
!WARNINGShort circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
Battery 2
160A
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
Battery 2
Battery 3
160A
160A
160A
160A
Battery 1 Battery 1
LE panel
AD panel
AC/DC frame
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
141141
141141
141
422418
140
140 140
Service 1Service 2/1
BAT
ϑ
ϑ
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 125
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.122 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3)
Fig. 2.123 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2
Battery 1 Battery 1Battery 1Battery 1
Battery 2 Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 2
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
HU for LE 0 - 5or
Battery 3
160A
HU for LE 0 - 5
423
422
418
141141141141
141141
141
141
422
140140
140
140
Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A
AD panel
LE panel(S1/A)
LE panel (S2)
AC/DC frame
LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)
BAT1)
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
160A
B A
160A
A B
160A
A B
160A
B A
18
0A
ABB
R 3
3
1)
1)
1)
1)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
from AC/DC system
to subsequent Service2 cabinet
AD panel (ADP)
0V -48V
set o
f bat
terie
s in
set o
f bat
terie
s in
Ser
vice
1A
1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of
F:BARTTERY
Ser
vice
2
126 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.4.3 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)The battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with AD panel variantADP-2V1 is shown in the following table.
CableNo
From To Color Lengthm
Factory No.S30861-*
518 /1 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or2 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240;240XL
blue 1.90 X215-A190
518 /2 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 2.10
519 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240;240XL
blue 3.10 X215-A191
519 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 3.30
522 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240;240XL
blue 2.60 X215-A159
522 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.40
522 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 240;240XL
blue 2.60 X215-A159
522 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 2.40
522 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 240;240XL
blue 2.60 X215-A159
522 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 black 2.40
523 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240;240XL
blue 3.00 X215-A160
523 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.70
523 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 240 blue 3.00 X215-A160
523 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 2.70
540 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 240;240XL
blue 0.55 X215-A158
540 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0.55
540 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 240;240XL
blue 0.55 X215-A158
540 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0.55
541 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) 240;240XL
blue 0.265 *1)
541 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0.275
*1) only for battery pole with tapped hole M8: S30864-X215-A161; only for battery pole with tapped hole M10:S30864-X215-A162
Tab. 2.41 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 127
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.124 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
CableNo
Signal Name From To Factory No.S30864-*
53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,(+0V) *1)
X216-A92
*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no batteryinstalled, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.
Tab. 2.42 Battery sensor cabling
!WARNINGShort circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
Battery 1 Battery 1Battery 1Battery 1
Battery 2 Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 2
HU for LE 0 - 5or
Battery 3
HU for LE 0 - 5
523
141541541541
541541
541
541
522
540540
540
540
Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A
LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)FAN#0 FAN#1
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
160A
518540 540
540
540
522
FAN#0 FAN#1
518-1 or 519-1518-2 or
If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2should be used to connect theMK: Battery with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
B
E2
E1
Batt519-2
*1)
*1)
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
128 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.125 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
Battery 2
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 1 Battery 1
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
541541
541541
541
522518
540
540 540
Service 1Service 2/1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
160A
160A 16
0A16
0A
160A
540
540
540
518-1 or 519-1518-2 or
If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2should be used to connect theMK:Battery with a Service1A Rack,equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
B
E2
E1
Batt 519-2
*1)
*1)
ϑ
ϑ
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 129
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.4.4 Battery Alarm Cable ConnectionsThe cable connections of the battery breaker alarm is shown in the circuit diagram be-low. The alarm terminals of each MK:Battery within a service rack will be connected inseries to lead them to the alarm-terminal of the ACTC.
Fig. 2.126 Battery alarm cables
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
ACTCDCP:LEBREAK2or ADPA/F:ACTC
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
463
462
463
Service2/n
Cable 462: S30864-X211-A173 (Set: 2 x 462)Cable 463: S30864-X211-A174
FAN#0 FAN#1
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
463
462
462
Service1A
130 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.4.5 DC Cabling between the Racks (BS-240 / 240XL)The DC cabling is required for routing of the -48V voltage from the DC panel of Service1rack to the DC panels of all installed racks on site for power supply of the boards in Baseand Extension racks and the link equipment inside the Service racks.
Fig. 2.127 Routing of the DC power supply wires
Fig. 2.128 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL
Fig. 2.129 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks
unscrew
DC supply wires
+0 V -48 V
33 1)
34 1)35 1)
36 1)
DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel
Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack Extension2 Rack
terminal block
279 2)
1) Component of MK: CARSV1
2) S30864-X211-A69
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 131
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.130 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks
cable no. polarity from DC-PanelService1 Rack
to rack color
33 0 V-48 V
13b14b
Service 2 / 5bService 2 / 2b
blackblue
34 0 V-48 V
11b12b
Base / 9bBase / 4b
blackblue
35 0 V-48 V
9b10b
Extension 1 / 9bExtension 1 / 4b
blackblue
36 0 V-48 V
7b8b
Extension 2 / 9bExtension 2 / 4b
blackblue
DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no. polarity from DC-PanelService2/x Rack
to DC-PanelService2/x+1 Rack
color
279 0 V-48 V
5a2a
5b2b
blackblue
Tab. 2.43 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks
33 1)
34 1)35 1)DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel
Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack
279 2)
1) Component of MK: CARSV1 2) S30864-X211-A69
cable no. polarity from DC-PanelService1 Rack
to rack color
33 0 V-48 V
11b12b
Service2 / 5bService2 / 2b
blackblue
34 0 V-48 V
9b10b
Base / 10bBase / 5b
blackblue
35 0 V-48 V
7b8b
Extension1 / 8bExtension1 / 4b
blackblue
DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no. polarity from DC-PanelService2/x Rack
to DC-PanelService2/x+1 Rack
color
279 0 V-48 V
5a2a
5b2b
blackblue
Tab. 2.44 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks
132 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.4.6 DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)The figure below shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panelADPAV3 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of BS-240 II / 240XL II.
Fig. 2.131 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)
Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC powersupply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case aService1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08
ACTC0V-48V
+ ++
Service1A Base Extension1 Extension2
415
413 415
414
414
413
DC panel
ACTC
- -- -+
+ -
LE
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2BAT0 1
12
X29
BR 33
Service Socket
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panelFAN0 FAN1
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1 FAN0 FAN1AC/DC
AD-Panel ADPAV3
!WARNINGShort circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, useonly an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
cableno.
polarity from to rack color Factory-No.
S30864-*
Lengthm
413/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A56 1,50
413/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black
414/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A57 2,20
414/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black
415/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 blue X215-A58 2,80
415/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black
Tab. 2.45 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 133
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.4.7 -48V DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)The following figure shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panelADP-2V1 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of the BS-240 II / 240XL II.
Fig. 2.132 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)
Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC powersupply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case aService1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5C
OB
A 0
CO
SA
0C
OB
A 1
CO
SA
1CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
DC-Panel DC-PanelAD-Panel ADP-2V1
513-1513-2
514-1514-2
515-1515-2
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
If the cables 513 - 515 1/2should be used to connect theBase- and Extension Racks with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
DC-Panel
513-2513-1
514-2514-1
515-2515-1
DCP:LEBREAK
B
E2
E1
Batt
!WARNINGShort circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, useonly an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
cableno.
polarity from to rack color Factory-No.
S30864-*
Lengthm
513/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A192 1,15
513/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black 1,10
514/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A193 1,75
514/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black 1,70
515/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 blue X215-A194 2,35
515/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black 2,30
Tab. 2.46 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)
134 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.4.8 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage tothe modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example ofDC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurationsare listed in Tab. 2.47. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.
Fig. 2.133 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
ACTC
0V-48V
+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK2
Service1A
AC/DC frame
406406
402
Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1
4031)
4032)
4033)
4034)
2): if Service1A without DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment3), 4): if Service 2/1 with additional second DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipmentfor 1), 2), 3) and 4) see also table below
+ ++
ACTC
- -- -+
+ -
LE
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2BAT0 1
12
X29
BR 33
AD Panel
Service Socket
0V
LE breaker
-48V
+ + - -
FAN0 FAN1
ACTC
0V -48V
X10
+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK
ACTC
0V-48V
+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK2ACTC
0V-48V
+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK2
+ -
cableno.
polarity from to rack color Factory-No.
S30864-*
Lengthm
402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A40 1,20
0 V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
403, 1) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 black
403, 2) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:ADP:x29:1 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:ADP:x29:2 black
403, 3) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
403, 4) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
Tab. 2.47 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 135
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.4.9 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage tothe modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example ofDC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurationsare listed in Tab. 2.48. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.
Fig. 2.134 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
406 -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80
0 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
406 -48 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80
0 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
cableno.
polarity from to rack color Factory-No.
S30864-*
Lengthm
Tab. 2.47 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5C
OB
A 0
CO
SA
0C
OB
A 1
CO
SA
1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
DC-PanelAD-Panel
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
33/M
402
503
Service2 Rack
X29
F:ACTC
DCP:LEBREAKX10
DCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK
X10X10
160A
160A
with LE in Service1A
136 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.135 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5C
OB
A 0
CO
SA
0C
OB
A 1
CO
SA
1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A Rack Base Rack
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
DC-PanelAD-Panel
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
33/M 503
X29
F:ACTCDCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK
X10X10
160A
160A
Service2 Rack Service2 Rack16
0A
without LE in Service1A
cableno.
polarity from to rack color Factory-No.
S30864-*
Lengthm
402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-A40 1,20
0 V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
503 -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-A164
1,30
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
33/M -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211-A152
0,90
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
33/M -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211-A152
0,90
0 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
Tab. 2.48 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 137
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.4.10 CAN-Bus ConnectionsThe CAN-Bus will be routed in loop configuration through the racks to collect externaland internal alarms and lead them to the ACT of the Base rack.
The configuration rules for CAN-Bus connections are valid for BS-240 / BS-240XL andBS-240 II / 240XL II rack types.
The assignment of the cable length to the rack configuration is dependent on the mount-ing sequence. The CAN-Bus must be terminated at the end (CAN OUT) with the termi-nating resistor S30861-K2047-K. This measure is mandatory.
The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guidedinside the Rack roof/cover area.
The Tab. 2.49 and the Fig. 2.137 show an example of CAN-Bus connections.
Fig. 2.136 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces
cable no. from CAN OUT to CAN IN Code no. length
245 Base Service1 S30864-X210-A11 1200 mm
246 Service1/ Service1A Extension1 S30864-X210-A12 1900 mm
247 Extension1 Service2/1 S30864-X210-A13 2600 mm
248 Service2/1 Extension2 S30864-X210-A14 3300 mm
249 Extension2 Service2/2 S30864-X210-A15 4000 mm
Cables for configurations with distance betweenthe cabinets
S30864-X210-A60 6800 mm
S30864-X210-A61 7800 mm
S30864-X210-A63 5000 mm
S30864-X210-A66 12000 mm
Tab. 2.49 Example for CAN-Bus cabling
CAN IN
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
terminatin
g resis
tor
138 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.137 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections
2.7.4.11 SELIC-Cabling between the RacksThe SELIC-cabling (CC-link) provides a connection between the core modules in theBase rack and the carrier units in the Extension racks.These connections are absoluterequired for transmission of signalling and alarms between the racks. The interfaces arelocated on the EMI panel of Base- and Extension racks.
In a standard configuration the same type of racks will be connected only. For each con-nection (Base to Extension1/2), prefabricated cables are provided. These cables(S30864-X210-A2, -A23, -A38) are component of the relevant Extension racks.
Fig. 2.138 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240)
Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1 Base Extension1 Extension2
245
246
248249
247
CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN TEST LPA
terminatingresistor
rear side
(for BS-240/-240II only)
- 48 V
SERIAL IF CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN TEST LPA
- 48 V
SERIAL IF CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN TEST LPA
- 48 V
SERIAL IF
EMI-P: RS EMI-P: RB EMI-P: RE
front side of racks
of racks
Ext. 1 CU 0...3
Ext. 1 CU 4...7
Ext. 2 CU 4...7
Ext. 2 CU 0...3
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 139
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.139 SELIC-cabling between the racks BS-240 / 240 II
Rack-type
Cableno.
From interfaceBase Rack
To interface Exten-sion Rack
FactoryNo.:
S30864-*
Cablelength
BS-240 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A2 1975 mm
Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 Extension 2 CU 4...7
Tab. 2.50 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240
Rack-type
Cableno.
From interfaceBase Rack
To interface Exten-sion Rack
FactoryNo.:
S30864-*
Cablelength
BS-240 II 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A38 1920 mm
Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 Extension 2 CU 4...7
Tab. 2.51 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240 II
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
(Ext.2) CU 0...3
(Ext.2) CU 4...7
CU 4...7
CU 0...3
Base Rack Extension 1 Rack Extension 2 Rack
277
278
CU 4...7
CU 0...3
140 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.140 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240XL)
Fig. 2.141 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL / 240XL II
Rack type CableNo.
From interfaceBase Rack
To interface Exten-sion Rack
FactoryNo.:
S30864-*
Cablelength
BS-240XL 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm
162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7
330 Ext.1 CU 8...11 Extension1 CU 8...11
BS-240XL II 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm
162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7
330 Ext.1 CU 8...11 Extension1 CU 8...11
Tab. 2.52 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II
Ext. 1 CU 8..11
Ext. 1 CU 0...3
Ext. 1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Base Rack Extension 1 Rack
330
Ext.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 8...11
162161
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 141
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.5 Inter-Rack Cabling (mixed Configuration)This chapter provides information about the cable connections between racks, depen-dent on the rack type and equipping variant (BS-240 / 240XL with BS-240 II / 240XL II).Inter-rack cables are not pre-installed in the factory and foreseen for setup on site.
The required distances rack rear to wall must be considered. The required minimum dis-tances for the rack variants are listed in Fig. 2.20. In case of mixed configuration, theBS-240 racks have be shifted 50 mm away from the wall, to allow the rack interconnec-tion of both rack types.
The -48V DC cable connection between the racks will be routed through the cut-outs atthe side walls of the racks.
The power cables of the BS-240 cabinets are routed behind the DC-Panel cover and thepower cable of the BS-240 II cabinets are routed visible in front of the DC-Panel.
If racks have to be fixed to the floor with earthquake kits, the relevant minimum distanceto the wall is 150 mm.
The covered cut-outs plates at the sides of the rack and the break-out pieces of the topcovers of first and second generation are not corresponding. Therefore the rack inter-connections for SELIC-, CAN-Bus- and EMC/grounding have to be routed through re-moved break-out pieces at the rear of the rack‘s top covers (see Fig. 2.142).
Fig. 2.142 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing
2. Generation 1. Generation
View of rear side
Cover
Cables: e.g. CAN-BusSELICEMC-cable
Cover
i NOTEAccording to the relevant EMC requirements, the top cover of the rack have to bemounted always!
142 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.1 Battery Cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II RacksThe battery backup time of already installed BS-240 racks can be extended with addi-tional battery sets inside of BS-240 II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will usedfor connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with theAC/DC frames (BS-240) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240 II), cable kits are provided for theconnection of BS-240 II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-240 Service1rack.
Fig. 2.143 Example of Battery Cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service Racks
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/2
160A
160A
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/3
160A
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
F:AC/DC 1
110/1
111/1
168
166
BAT0
110/4M111/4M
110/3M111/3M
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 4 for LE
168
168
182 181
LE-Panel
BAT1
BAT1
160A
166
166
110/2
111/2
F:AC/DC 2
110/4M
111/4M
110/2
111/2
to S2/3
from S1
Service2/1 Service1
BS-240 II Rack BS-240 II Rack BS-240 RackBS-240 Rack
111/3M
110/3M
BAT2
BAT2
BAT2
BAT3
BAT3
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
2625 27 28
+ +- -
BAT 0 BAT 1
F:AC/DC 1
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
1514 16 17
+ +- -
BAT 2 BAT 3
F:AC/DC 2
112/2ϑ
112/1ϑ
112/3ϑ
112/4ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 143
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the sec-
ond generation. Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set ofthe relevant MK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must beimplemented.
Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color
110/1/M111/1/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A146
1300 mm blueblack
110/2/M111/2/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-28bS1/F:AC/DC1-27b
S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-)S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A147
3300 mm blueblack
110/3/M111/3/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-15bS1/F:AC/DC2-14b
S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-)S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A148
3700 mm blueblack
110/4/M111/4/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-17bS1/F:AC/DC2-16b
S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-)S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A149
4600 mm blueblack
Tab. 2.53 Battery Cable Kits for Connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 Racks
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
Tab. 2.54 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables
i NOTEThe terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum cur-rent rating of 75 Ampere.
144 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.2 Battery Cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II RacksThe battery backup time of already installed BS-240XL racks can be extended with ad-ditional battery sets inside of BS-240XL II racks. In addition to the battery kits that willused for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets withthe AC/DC frames (BS-240XL) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240XL II), cable kits are pro-vided for the connection of BS-240XL II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in theBS-240XL Service1 rack.
Fig. 2.144 Example of Battery Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
F:AC/DC 1
110/1
111/1
168
166
110/4M111/4M
110/3M
111/3M
F:AC/DC 2
110/2
111/2
Service1
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LEHU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 RackSIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/2 Rack
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LEHU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
166
168
160A
160A
160A
160A
S2/3to
S1from
ϑ ϑϑ
S2/2to
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
2625 27 28
+ +- -
BAT 0 BAT 1
F:AC/DC 1
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
1514 16 17
+ +- -
BAT 2 BAT 3
F:AC/DC 2
112/2ϑ
112/1ϑ
112/3ϑ
112/4ϑ
first Generationsecond Generation second Generation
BAT1BAT2 BAT 0
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 145
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the sec-
ond generation.Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of the relevantMK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be implemented.
Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color
110/1111/1
S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 (-)S1 BAT0 (+)
S30864-X211-A33
1750 mm blueblack
110/1/M111/1/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A133
1750 mm blueblack
110/2/M111/2/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-28bS1/F:AC/DC1-27b
S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-)S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A134
3300 mm blueblack
110/3/M111/3/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-15bS1/F:AC/DC2-14b
S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-)S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A135
4200 mm blueblack
110/4/M111/4/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-17bS1/F:AC/DC2-16b
S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-)S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A136
4700 mm blueblack
Tab. 2.55 Battery Cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 Racks
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm
112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm
Tab. 2.56 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables
i NOTEThe terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum cur-rent rating of 75 Ampere.
146 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.3 Battery Cabling ActivitiesConnect the battery sets with the corresponding AC/DC frame as follows– Connect the wire 110/*/M (blue) at the -48 V terminal and the 111/*/M wire (black)
at the +0 V terminal of the MK:BATTERY.– Tighten the connection with torque wrench SW13 to 15 Nm.– Attach the cable lug of the tempresistor cable 112/* to the + pole of the battery set.– Route the wires through the rack interconnection holes the Service1 rack.– Remove the cover plate of the AC/DC frame.– Insert the wires into the matching WAGO terminals of AC/DC frame 1 or 2 in accor-
dance with Fig. 2.146.– Plug in the tempresistor cables at the sockets T 0 and T1 (see Tab. 2.54 for BS-240
and Tab. 2.56 for BS-240XL).
Fig. 2.145 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M
Fig. 2.146 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC
connection with F:AC/DC
Connection with MK:Battery
precuttedin the factory
BAT 2 BAT3- + -+
BAT 0 BAT1- + -+
F:AC/DC 1 F:AC/DC 2
T0
T1
T0
T1
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 147
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.5.4 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, ExtensionAn example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (secondgeneration) is shown in Fig. 2.147.
Fig. 2.147 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1
The following rule must be taken into account:– The DC-breaker ratings of Service1 are limited (50A) for DC power supply the Base
and Extension racks. Therefore only CU configurations can be implemented in Baseand Extension, which DC supply currents not exceed the breaker rating of 50A.
ACTC0V-48V
DC-Panel
Base Extension1
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panel
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1
Service1
b b
bbbbbbbb
a a a a a a a a aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c c
123456789101112131415
DCP:RSHS1
to Baseto Ext.1(to Ext.2)(to
Serv.2)
1)
1) Type of cable (16 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C105 (black)
first Generationsecond Generation
second Generation
1)
C39195-Z70-C66 (blue)
BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
148 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.5 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, ExtensionThe Fig. 2.148 shows an example for the -48V power supply connection of a Service1Arack BS-240 II with Base and Extension BS-240. The Service1A rack is equipped withthe AD-panel ADPA.
Fig. 2.148 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3)
i NOTEIf a Service1A supplies a Base (second generation) or an Extension (second genera-tion) the 80A DC-breakers (AD-panel: BR28, BR29 and BR30) must be replaced by a50A type! This reduction in power for the affected rack must be considered for configu-ration planning! Therefore a mounting kit must be ordered with three 50A breakers (Fac-tory no.: S30864-X215-A126).
SIEMENS
0V -48VLE Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel 180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V
X29
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A
ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHB DCP:RSHE
Extension1Base
a
b
c
4
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b2357810111213
a
b
c
1
a
b
c
6914
aa
b
b
c
c
d
a
b
c
4
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b2357810111213
a
b
c
1
a
b
c
6914
aa
b
b
c
c
d
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
-48V -48V0V0V
second Generation first Generationfirst Generation
461 462
HU # 4for LE
HU # 5for LE
Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.
461 S1A/ADPA/B/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.6 m S30864-X215-A127
S1A/ADPA/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
462 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V Extension1/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2.2 m S30864-X215-A128
S1A/ADPA/E1/ 0V Extension1/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
463 S1A/ADPA/E2/ -48V Extension2/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2.8 m S30864-X215-A129
S1A/ADPA/E2/ 0V Extension2/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
Tab. 2.57 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 149
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
If the Service1A is equipped with an AD-panel ADP-2V1, connect it with the Base- andExtension racks of the BS-240 as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.149 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1)
FAN#0 FAN#1
DCP:LEBREAK
ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHE
a
b
c
4
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b2357810111213
a
b
c
1
a
b
c
6914
aa
b
b
c
c
d
a
b
c
4
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b2357810111213
a
b
c
1
a
b
c
6914
aa
b
b
c
c
d
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
-48V -48V0V0V
513 514
513-1513-2
514-1514-2
515-1515-2
AD-Panel ADP-2V1
513 514 515*
515* to Extension2
Service1A Base Extension1second Generation first Generationfirst Generation
DCP:RSHBDCP:RSHB
If the cables 513-515 1/2should be used to connect theBase- and Extension Racks with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPA,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
Batt
Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.
513 S1A/ADP-2V1/B/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.15 m S30864-X215-A192
S1A/ADP-2V1/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 1,10 m
514 S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.75 m S30864-X215-A193
S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 1,70 m
515 S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2,35 m S30864-X215-A194
S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 2,30 m
Tab. 2.58 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)
150 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.6 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-tion) is shown in Fig. 2.150.
Fig. 2.150 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks
i NOTEFor the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory.
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LEHU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Rack
160A
160A
Service1
b b
bbbbbbbb
a a a a a a a a aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c c
123456789101112131415
DCP:RSHS1
to Baseto Ext.1(to Ext.2)
(to Serv.2)
first Generation
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/2 Rack
160A
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1
second Generationsecond Generation
33/M
33
to Service2/3
Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVxType of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)
C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
3333/M
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 151
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.5.7 DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)is shown in Fig. 2.151 (example with AD-panel ADPA).
Fig. 2.151 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3)
i NOTEService1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of firstgeneration! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.
i NOTEThe total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks mustnot exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel 180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V
X29
FAN#0 FAN#1ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
33/M
402
Service1AService2/1Service2/2
second Generationfirst Generationfirst Generation
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
0V -48V 0V -48V
to Service2/3 to Service2/2
453
45333/M
33/M33/M
to Service2/1 to Service1A
Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)
C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
33/M
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
160A
HU # 4for LE
HU # 5for LE
152 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.152 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1Asecond Generation
ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
33/M
first Generationfirst Generation
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
0V -48V 0V -48V
to Service2/3 to Service2/2
33/M
33/M33/M
to Service2/1 to Service1A
33/M
503
503
Cable No. 503: S30864-X215-A164, length 1.30 mCable No. 33/M: S30864-X215-A152, length 0.90 m
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 153
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.5.8 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, ExtensionAn example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (secondgeneration) is shown in Fig. 2.153.
Fig. 2.153 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1
ACTC0V-48V
DC-Panel
Base Extension1
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panel
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1
Service1
b
b
bbbb
bb
a aa a aa
aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c123478910111213
DCP:R12S1
(to Serv.2)
1)
1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)
first Generation second Generationsecond Generation
1)
C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)
BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
34
35 to Ext.1
to Base
56
(Component of MK:CARSV1 / S30864-X215-A28)
154 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.9 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, ExtensionThe Fig. 2.154 shows an example of the -48V power supply connections between aService1A rack and Base / Extension rack (first generation).
Fig. 2.154 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1
b
aa
a a a
b
b b b
c c c
1237891011 45a
b
a
b
c
b
a
6
a
b
b
a a
b
c c
b
a a
b
c c
1213
SIEMENS
0V -48VLE Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel 180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V
X29
160A
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A
ACTC ACTC
DCP:R12B DCP:R12E
Extension1Base
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
-48V0V
second Generation first Generationfirst Generation
DC-Panel DC-Panel
c
b
a
b
aa a a a
b
b b b
c c c c
1238910111213 56
b
a a
b
c c
4a
b
c
b
a
7
a
b
b
a a
b
c c
b
a a
b
c c
1415
413 414-48V0V
1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 155
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.5.10 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-tion) is displayed in Fig. 2.155.
Fig. 2.155 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2
i NOTEFor the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory!
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LEHU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Rack
160A
160A
Service1
b b
bbbbbbbb
a a a a a a a a aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c c
123456789101112131415
DCP:RSHS1
to Baseto Ext.1(to
Serv.2)
first Generation
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/2 Rack
160A
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1
second Generationsecond Generation
33/M
33
to Service2/3
Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVxType of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)
C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
3333/M
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LEHU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
156 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.5.11 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)is shown in Fig. 2.156.
Fig. 2.156 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2
i NOTEService1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of firstgeneration! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.
i NOTEThe total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks mustnot exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel 180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V
X29
160A
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
33/M
402
Service1AService2/1Service2/2
second Generationfirst Generationfirst Generation
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
0V -48V 0V -48V
to Service2/3 to Service2/2
453
45333/M
33/M33/M
to Service2/1 to Service1A
Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)
C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
33/M
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 157
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.5.12 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks (mixed Configuration)In case of extension of an existing Base Station system with additional Extension racksthe following combinations are possible:– BS-240 Base -> BS-240 II Extension– BS-240 Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240 Extension– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 Extension– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 II Extension
The necessary cables for extension combinations have to be ordered additionally (seeTab. 2.59 and Tab. 2.60). For mixed configuration with distance between the racks(Tab. 2.60) the cable sets include an appropriate CAN-Bus cable.
Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*
BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /240XL II Ext.
BS-240 Base cable length see standardconfiguration
1920 mm 1460 mm
S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A27
BS-240 II Base cable length 1920 mm see standardconfiguration
1460 mm
S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A69
BS-240XL /240XL II Base
cable length 1460 mm 1460 mm see standardconfiguration
S30864-* X210-A74 X210-A75
Tab. 2.59 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets)
Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*
BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /240XL II Ext.
BS-240 Base cable length 4120 mm or6970 mm
4070 mm or6920 mm
3612 mm or6462 mm
S30864-* X211-A123 orA118
X211-A132 orA133
X211-A125 orA120
BS-240 II Base cable length 4070 mm or6920 mm
4070 mm or6920 mm
3612 mm or6462 mm
S30864-* X211-A132 orA133
X211-A126 orA121
X211-A134 orA135
BS-240XL /240XL II Base
cable length 3612 mm or6462 mm
3612 mm or6462 mm
3114 mm or5960 mm
S30864-* X211-A136 orA137
X211-A138 orA139
X211-A122 orA116
Tab. 2.60 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets)
158 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.6 Combination of Racks with different Heights
2.7.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / ExtensionA BS-240XL II Extension rack can be added to an existing BS-240 II Base rack to in-crease BTS capacity.
Fig. 2.157 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension)
Use the following pre-fabricated cables for connection of the racks:– Cable 414: DC cable pair (25 mm2) with braided shield, copper wires 0.15 mm,
tinned, C39195-Z70-C158 (BK Type S07V-C4V5-K)– Cable 446: Grounding cable (16 mm2), C39195-Z70-C105 (BK Type S07V-K)
The outer insulation of both DC-cables that to be routed through the cable feeding mod-ule of the Service1A rack has to be removed at the EMC-gasket (see Fig. 2.158). Thismeasure guarantees a proper contact between the cable screen and the mesh screenedrubber profiles.
0V -48VLE Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel 180A
BR 33
B E1E2 B E1E2 10-48V
X29
160A
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A
HU # 4for LE
HU # 5for LE
ACTC0V-48V
Base
BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
Extension1
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panel
FAN0 FAN1
FAN0 FAN1
MSU:DCcable duct
cable ties
screening measuresee view A
screening measuresee view B
BS-240 II BS-240 II BS-240XL II
414
413
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 159
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.158 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module
Route the DC-cables to the rear side of the Extension rack in a suitable cable duct. Re-move the insolation of the cables approximately 15 mm for contact of the screen to thestress relieving clamp at the right edge of rack (Fig. 2.159). Connect the cables 414-1and 414-2 to the terminal block of the MSU:DC.
Fig. 2.159 (View B) Cable connections to Ground and MSU:DC of Extension
The connection between the racks will be completed by the routing of the commonground cable no. 446. The cable is equipped with cable lugs at both ends and will beattached to the M8 ground bolts at the rear side of the EMI panel.
For SELIC cabling refer to the chapter 2.7.5.12.
For CAN-Bus cabling refer to the chapter 2.7.4.10.
15 m
m
-48V +0V
EMC - bar
414
cable ties
stress - relieving
to MSU:DC
DC -cables from Service1A rack
screen connection
from Service1A rackcommon ground cable 446
414-1414-2
-48V+0V
rear side of rack
grounding bolts
160 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.7.7 Installation of Link EquipmentThe link equipment acts as a front end, to provide the Abis interface. Different equipmentcan be used for wire or radio transmission. Which equipment will be used depends oncustomer requirements.
The number of link equipment, that can be installed depends on the height of the units.
For the installation of link equipment, the mounting kit MK:LE is needed always and de-signed for 19” units. The MK:LE will fixed at the mounting bars on the right and left sideof the rack. 4 screws Torx T30 are needed for fixing.
The MK:LE holds the customer-dependent frames for microwave equipment or theframe for 2 NTPM, F:NT (german market only).
The installation of link equipment in the mounting kit has always to start at the top of themounting kit below the DC-panel without a gap, so that the airflow inside the rack willnot be affected.
Fig. 2.160 Mounting Kit for Link Equipment MK:LE
i NOTEFor connections between Abis interface in the Base rack and link equipment in the Ser-vice rack, pay attention to the recommendation CCITT G.703.The receive level compared with the transmit level should not be lower than 6 dB.
MK:LE
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 161
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.7.7.1 Installation of Microwave EquipmentIn case of microwave transmission, the indoor units inside the Service rack have to beconnected via the microwave antenna cables with the tower mounted outdoor units.
Connect the microwave antenna cables at the indoor units as follows:
1. Remove the front part of cable feeding module.2. Feed the microwave cables through the cable feeding module forward to the front
connectors of microwave indoor units.3. Fix the microwave cables at the front connectors of the indoor units. The connector
type and fixing torque depends on the equipment, provided by the customer.4. Bend the microwave cables into the a position that it is able to close the cable feed-
ing module without any pressure and tension.5. Fix removable part in its original position.6. Fix each cable at the strain reliefs of the feeding module with cable ties.
The next step is the connection of the microwave indoor units with the -48 VDC circuit ofthe Service rack and the alarm lines at the spring terminals of the ACTC. Because con-struction differences between the BS-240 and the BS-240 II rack, proceed in differentways. In case of BS-240 Service racks perform the following steps:
1. Connect the microwave power supply / alarm cables (S30864-X211-A57) at the frontconnectors of ACTC (see the following figure).
2. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the right subrackmounting bar with cable ties.
3. Attach equipment-specific connectors at the cable ends that should be connected tothe microwave units.
Fig. 2.161 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL)
i NOTEThe outer insulation of the microwave antenna cables has to be removed in the area ofthe cable feeding module for proper ground contact to the metal lids.
up to 9 cablesS30864-K2045-X-*-7483
frame forlink equipment
(ACTC)
Service rack
AL15_P µWave (white)AL15_P AL_GND (black)
DC_µWave... PUE +0 V (red)DC_µWave... MUE -48 V (blue)
microwave connectors
1 2 3
4 5 6
97 8
162 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Install the DC-supply wires in case of the BS-240 II Service1A rack as follows:
1. Remove the cover plate of the DC-distribution block at the DC-panel.2. Fit the breakers for link equipment (can be 4A breaker, V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A,
V39118-Z4005-A91). The number of breakers depends on the volume of microwaveunits, that should be installed.
3. Connect the blue/black twisted wire pairs (cable no. 401, S30864-X215-A39) at the2-pole connectors X25F (R)- X32F (R) of the DC-distribution block.
4. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the left subrack mount-ing bar with cable ties.
5. Attach the equipment-specific connector at the cable ends, that should be connect-ed at the DC-input of the microwave units.
Fig. 2.162 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401)
Install the alarm line connection between the microwave units and the ACTC:
1. Measure the distance between the alarm output of the microwave units and the ter-minal block of the ACTC module in the F:ACTC-2V1.
2. Cut stranded wires with a cross section in the range of 0,08 mm2 - 0,5 mm2 (e.g.LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 blue/black) to the required length.
3. Remove 10 mm of the insulation and attach the wires to the matching spring termi-nals of the ACTC.
4. Route the wires down to the microwave units and fix the bundle at the right subrackmounting bar with cable ties.
5. If necessary, equip the stranded wires with a connector. The type depends on thealarm interface of the microwave units.
The installation steps of the DC-supply and alarm cables for the microwave units in theBS-240 II Service2 racks are equal to the Service 1A rack. In this case, the ACTC mod-ule is part of the DC-panel and located on the right of the link equipment breakers.
In the DC-panels of the Service2 rack, the link equipment breakers BR01- BR06 (con-nectors X25F (R) - X30F (R) can be used for the protection of the microwave units.
The following graphics should illustrate the DC cabling in both rack types.
remove the cover plate
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 163
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.163 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II)
Fig. 2.164 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II)
The next step is the routing of the PCM-lines between the OVPT / ABISCON in the Baserack and the PCM interfaces of the microwave indoor units. Therefore the pre-fabricatedcable S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 should be used. The cable is used as a splitter.
It consists of four single cables with Sub D-9 female connectors for the connection of amicrowave unit at each connector. The cables are attached to a common Sub D-25 fe-male connector. The cable will be expanded with cable S30864-X211-A112 for the con-nection with the OVPT / ABISCON.
BR01
4A or10A
BR02
4A or10A
BR06
4A or10A
BR05
4A or10A
BR03
4A or10A
BR04
4A or10A
BR07
4A or10A
BR08
4A or10A
-48 V
+0 V
X25
R
X25
F
X30
R
X30
F
X29
R
X29
F
X32
R
X32
F
X31
R
X31
F
X27
R
X27
F
X28
R
X28
F
X26
R
X26
F
mW
ave
3
mW
ave
2
mW
ave
1
mW
ave
0
mW
ave
4
mW
ave
7
mW
ave
6
mW
ave
5
mW
ave
9
mW
ave
11
mW
ave
10
mW
ave
8
example for 2 microwave units per breaker example for 1 microwave unit per breaker
cables no. 401cables no. 401
BR01
4A or10A
BR02
4A or10A
BR06
4A or10A
BR05
4A or10A
BR03
4A or10A
BR04
4A or10A
BR07
4A or10A
BR08
4A or10A
-48 V
+0 V
X25
R
X25
F
X30
R
X30
F
X29
R
X29
F
X32
R
X32
F
X31
R
X31
F
X27
R
X27
F
X28
R
X28
F
X26
R
X26
F
mW
ave
3
mW
ave
2
mW
ave
1
mW
ave
0
mW
ave
4
mW
ave
11
mW
ave
10
mW
ave
5
mW
ave
7
mW
ave
9
mW
ave
8
mW
ave
6
cables no. 401
AC
TC
, FA
N
AC
TC
, DC
IN
cable no. 408 407
164 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
An overview about the complete microwave cabling of both rack designs is given in thefollowing figure.
Signal Name Plug Sub D9 fPin No.
Plug Sub D25Pin No.
OVPT TerminalPin No.
cable no. S30864-X207-A8-*-7402
cable no. S30864-X211-A112
PCM 1 - ULA 1 1 22
PCM 1 - ULB 6 14 20
GND/G 3 3 18
PCM 1 - DLA 5 2 21
PCM 1 - DLB 9 15 19
GND/G --- --- 23
PCM 2 - ULA 1 4 16
PCM 2 - ULB 6 16 14
GND/G 3 18 18
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5 15
PCM 2 - DLB 9 17 13
GND/G --- --- 17
PCM 3 - ULA 1 6 10
PCM 3 - ULB 6 19 8
GND/G 3 8 12
PCM 3 - DLA 5 7 9
PCM 3 - DLB 9 20 7
GND/G --- --- 11
PCM 4 - ULA 1 9 4
PCM 4 - ULB 6 21 2
GND/G 3 23 6
PCM 4 - DLA 5 10 3
PCM 4 - DLB 9 22 1
GND/G --- --- 5
GND/G --- --- 28
Tab. 2.61 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 165
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.165 Overview of microwave cabling
2.7.7.2 Installation of NTPMIn case of transmission via terrestrial lines, the NTPMs are placed inside the Servicerack, that is equipped with a mounting kit for NTPM, called frame F:NT.
Each frame F:NT provides the equivalent space of 3 HU, allowing the installation of upto 2 NTPM side by side.
The frame F:NT provides 3 interfaces:– SubD 9, male with M3 fixings for -48 V output– SubD 25, female with M3 fixings for PCM input– SubD 25, male with M3 fixings for PCM output
In case of the BS-240, the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is partof the F:NT. For the BS-240 II Service1A / Service2 racks use the DC power cable
PCM0PCM1
LE1-4
LE5-8
ACTC
-48 Vdc supply and
Base Rackto ODU
F:CORE
OVPT
Service Rack
SubD 9
Sub D 9
Sub D 25
Sub D 25
f
f
f
fm
m
m
m
PCM0PCM1
LE1-4
LE5-8
ACTC
Base Rackto ODU
EMI panel
F:CORE
OVPT
Service Rack
rack front
SubD 9
Sub D 9
Sub D 25
Sub D 25
f
f
f
f
m
m
m
m
-48Vdcsupply lines
DC panel
alarm linestwisted pair
breaker panel
top view
BS-240 II / 240XL II BS-240 / 240XL
EMI panel
top view
rack front
alarm lines
1)1)
1) integral part of cabinet cabling2)3)4)
2) 2)
has to be prepared on sitepair of stranded wires, e.g. C39195-Z75-C510 (Type: LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 BL/SW VS)can be ordered as prepared cable (Octopus cable), order-no.: S30864-X207-A8-*-7402can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X215-A39, (twisted pair, blue: -48 Vdc, black: 0 Vdc)5)
3)
4)
4)
4)
4)
5)
can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30861-K2045-X-*-7483, (power cable for microwave module)6)
6)
7) 7)
7) can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X211-A112
i NOTEIt is necessary, to install a mounting kit MK:LE before mounting of the F:NT.
166 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
S30864-X216-A109 for the connections between the link equipment breakers (4A) andthe -48VDC input of the F:NT.
For the PCM connection between the OVPT/ABISCON and the F:NT the pre-fabricatedcable S30864-X211-A59 should be used. An overview of the cabling if the F:NT is in-stalled inside the racks is given in the following figure.
Fig. 2.166 Overview of NTPM cabling variants
PCM0PCM1
ACTC
-48 V
Service Rack Base Rack
OVPT
PCM lines
EMI panel
F:NT1
F:NT2
F:CORE
rack front
BS-240 / 240XLBS-240 II / 240XL II
PCM0PCM1
ACTC
Service Rack Base Rack
OVPT
EMI panel
F:NT1
F:NT2
F:CORE
rack front
PCM lines
DC panel
1) Integral part of cabinet cabling2) has to be prepared on site3) power supply cable: S30864-X216-A1094) cable S30864-X211-A59
5)
1) 1)
2)2)
3)-48Vdcsupply lines
4)4)
5)5)
2)
OVPTPCM0 PCM1
OVPTPCM1PCM06) 6)
see Figure: Interface on frame F:NT 6) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT7) 2 PCM links per F:NT if fully equipped with 2 modules
7)7)
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 167
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.167 Interfaces on frame F:NT
Name F:NT -48 V, subD 9 female pin
0 V 1,2,6
-48 V 4,5,9
Tab. 2.62 Pin Assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT
Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25female pin
F:NT PCM-OUTPUT subD 25male pin
PCM 1 - ULA 1 1
PCM 1 - ULB 14 14
GND/G 3 3
PCM 1 - DLA 2 2
PCM 1 - DLB 15 15
GND/G 16 16
PCM 2 - ULA 4 4
PCM 2 - ULB 17 17
GND/G 6 6
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5
PCM 2 - DLB 18 18
GND/G 19 19
Tab. 2.63 Pin Assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT
to OVPT / ABISCON
external PCM lines
- 48 VDC
168 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.8 Installation of the Modules
For later extension or maintenance it is useful to have a basic knowledge about the cor-rect removal and replacement of the Core- and RF modules. Two variants for the fixingof the modules in the subracks does exist. A lever mechanism will be used for fixing ofthe Core modules COBA and COSA. Fixing screws at the upper and lower edge areused for securing of the RF modules.The handling is shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.168 Fixing variants of the modules
Fig. 2.169 Handling of the lever mechanism
To prevent the installation of the plug-in modules at incorrect mounting positions, eachrelevant modules provide code keys.
Module Code Key
DUAMCO 7
FICOM 7
DIAMCO 8
CU 6
COBA 1
COSA 2
Tab. 2.64 Module HW Code Key
lever mechanism fixing screw
push together
lever mechanism in open position
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 169
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.170 Location of the code key no.
Pay attention to the following hints:– After removal of a module check the proper condition of the code key plugs on the
backplane.– Before a module will be plugged-in check the correct setting of the code key number,
this is to prevent damages at the backplane connectors (see table below).– Insert the modules without pressure.
2
code key no.
170 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.9 Nonstandard Installation WorksIf an already installed BS-240 should be extended with Service2 racks to provide a long-er battery backup time, the installation of a second AC/DC frame inside the Service1rack can be necessary.
2.9.1 Installation of the AC/DC FrameThe AC/DC frame consist of the parts as shown in the figure below.Complete the air duct first, but do not mount the duct before insert the fan unit connec-tors into the fitting holes at the rear of the AC/DC frame.
Fig. 2.171 Components of the AC/DC frame
Complete the air duct as displayed in Fig. 2.172 and Fig. 2.173 in steps as follows:– Insert both air flaps into the air duct frame, so that the flaps will be opened by the
air outlet stream.– Cover the air duct edges with the 4 rubber sealings.
Fig. 2.172 Fitting of the air flaps
AC/DC frame
air duct
air flaps
front cover
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 171
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
Fig. 2.173 Setup of the rubber sealing
Mount the AC/DC frame inside the Service1 rack as follows:– Setup the AC/DC frame in the position as shown in the figure below onto the battery
tray.– Open the cable ring in the upper rear of the rack and select the fan cables no. 51 and
no. 52.– Insert the cable connectors into the fitting holes, so that the connectors can be easy
moved inside the hole.– Pay attention to the correct cable no. because the connectors can not pulled out
without any damages.
Fig. 2.174 Plug-in of the fan cables
Install the connections between AC/DC frame 1 and 2:– Mount the prepared air duct at the rear of the AC/DC frame with both screws provid-
ed with the air duct parts (see Fig. 2.175).– Disconnect cable 91 from the CAN-OUT connector at the backplane of the AC/DC
frame 1 (see Fig. 2.175) and pull down the cable to AC/DC frame 2.– Plug-in cable no. 89 at the CAN-OUT connector of AC/DC frame 1. The cable is pro-
vided with AC/DC frame 2.
rubber sealing
51 52
172 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.175 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91
Fig. 2.176 Connection CAN-BUS and Interconnection Cable
– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed inFig. 2.176.
– Plug-in the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at connector CAN-OUT of the AC/DC frame 1.– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Fig. 2.176 at AC/DC frame 2.– Connect the cables no. 91 and 114 as shown in Fig. 2.177.
Fig. 2.177 Cable Connections at AC/DC frame 2
disconnect cable no. 91
screw
AC/DC frame 1
114
114
AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2
89
89
91
114
AC/DC frame 2 AC/DC frame 2
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 173
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
– Connect the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at the CAN-IN connector of the AC/DC frame 2.– Lift up the AC/DC frame to its mounting position (without gap below AC/DC frame 1).– Fix the frame with 4 screws Torx T30.
Install the -48 V DC-connections to the DC-Panel of the Service1 rack and connect bat-tery systems BAT2 and BAT3.– Connect the cables no. 107 and 108 at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2.– Connect the cables no. 110/3 and 111/3 (BAT2), 110/4 and 111/4 (BAT3) at the DC
clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2 if BS-240 Service2 are used.In case of BS-240 II Service2 racks the cables no. 110/3M and 111/3M (BAT2),110/4M and 111/4M (BAT3) have to be connect (see figure below).
Fig. 2.178 Connection of DC and Battery Cables
– Route the cable no. 229 (twisted pair wires, black / blue) from the AC/DC frame 2 toto the ACTC of the Service1 rack.
– Remove the jumper at the BB1connector of the ACTC and insert the plug of thecable no. 229.
Fig. 2.179 Routing of the Battery Breaker Cable
Complete the installation of the AC/DC frame 2:– Plug in both fan units. Push down the lids (see Fig. 2.180) during the fitting.– Fix the cover plates of the AC/DC frames 1 and 2.
108/A
108/B
107/A107/B 107/A
107/B108/A108/B
110/3M111/3M
110/4M
111/4M
AC/DC frame 1AC/DC frame 2
229
remove jumper
229
174 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
Fig. 2.180 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame
2.10 Setup of System CablingThe system cabling consists of connections are installed on the front of the rack. Cablingconfigurations depend on the different equipping variants (e.g., type of combining, ca-pacity stage) and the cell configuration of the site.
The system cabling is already installed in the factory. This section provides informationfor setup additional system cables for extension of RF modules or the cell configurationmust be changed.
System cables will be shipped in a box to avoid twisting and damage. Before starting theconnection procedure, refer to the site documentation and determine the types andnumber of cables.
The list of variant numbers (content of the site specific documentation) is needed for thecorrect setup of the cabling between the modules.
press
i NOTEFor further informations refer to “Configuration Rules for System Cabling”.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 175
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.10.1 System Cabling with semi-rigid Cables
Fig. 2.181 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable
The following table provides an overview of the types and functionality of the prefabri-cated cables.
i NOTEA minimum bending radius of 10 mm (semi-rigid.141 AI) and 3,5 mm (semi-rigid .86 AI)must be ensured.Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and atSMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm.Terminate all unused connectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!
connection code number length Path connector cable type
DUAMCO 0/3-CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-C113
1600mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
DUAMCO 1/2-CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-C118
1250mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3-CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-C160
1250mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
DUAMCO 1/2-CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-C114
1050mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
FICOM-0/3CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-C160
1250mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
FICOM-1/2CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-C114
1050mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
DIAMCO-0CU 1,2/3,4/6,7
C39195-Z80-C116
600mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
Tab. 2.65 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II
176 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
DIAMCO-0/1CU 0/5
C39195-Z80-C117
750mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
DIAMCO-1CU 2/3,4,6/7
C39195-Z80-C116
600mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
HPDU (Rack)-DIAMCO
C39195-Z80-C174
1250mm
RX SMA,90˚,male/N-Con,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
HPDU-FICOM (Rack)
C39195-Z80-C173
400mm
TX 7/16,90˚,male/7/16,90˚,male
1/2” jum-percable
DIAMCO (Rack0) -DIAMCO (Rack1)
C39195-Z80-C176
2700mm
Cas-cad
SMA,90˚,male/N-Con,90˚,male
Coax flexible
BIAS-T - DIAM-CO
C39195-Z80-C181
1450mm
RX SMA,90˚,male/N-Con,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
BIAS-T - HPDU C39195-Z80-C180
410mm
RX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
connection code number length Path connector cable type
DUAMCO 0/3- CU0/1/6/7
C39195-Z80-C206
1800mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3CU 2/3/8/9
C39195-Z80-C113
1600mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-CU 4/5/10/11
C39195-Z80-C118
1350mm
RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
semi-rigid.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3- CU0/1/6/7
C39195-Z80-C204
1650mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-CU 2/3/8/9
C39195-Z80-C160
1250mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-CU 4/5/10/11
C39195-Z80-C114
1050mm
TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
semi-rigid.141 Al
Tab. 2.66 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II
connection code number length Path connector cable type
Tab. 2.65 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II
i NOTEIn case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a shortsemi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors(N-type, female) of the modules. Fix the cable at the N-type connectors and screw theconnection to a “fingertight” torque (approx. 1,00 Nm). Avoid the twisting of the cableconnectors during the connection.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 177
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.10.2 System Cabling with Flexi-Cables
The cables have to be routed in such a way that allows the ease exchange of modules(CUs, Combiners and FANs). For this reason BTS Base-/Extension cabinets which havebeen equipped with flexible HF cabling in the factory always, come with a pair of cable-retainers fitted left-and right hand side at the bottom of each sub-rack (exception: lowestsubrack of a cabinet).
Route the cables, so that the LED-indications of the modules are visible and the testadapter connectors are accessible.
The task of these cable retainers - which are bended sheet metal parts - is to keep thoseflexible HF-cables in a neat position which inter-connect subracks.
If a customer decides to retrofit an 1th generation base station - which has not beenequipped with cable-retainers -with flexible HF cables, these cables must be loosely fit-ted with cable-ties.
Fig. 2.182 Example of system cabling with flexible cables
i NOTEFix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and atSMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm. Terminate all unused connectorsof the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!
i NOTEAttention: Fitting of HF cables with cable-ties is not allowed for base stations equippedwith these cable retainers.
i NOTEThe minimum single bending radius of the flexible cables is 20 mm. The minimum re-peated bending radius is 40 mm. The exceptional length of the cables have to be storedinside the vertical space between the subracks and the rack. The horizontal space be-low each subrack have not to be used to store the extra length of the system cables oranything else. This space is used as an air inlet for cooling.
178 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
connection code number length Path connector
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A14 1800 mm RX SMC,90˚,female/SMC,90˚,female
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A13 1600 mm RX SMC,90˚,female/SMC,90˚,female
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A15 1400 mm RX SMC,90˚,female/SMC,90˚,female
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A26 600 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A27 750 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A48 400 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A50 1000 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A51 1200 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A39 390 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A49 600 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A54 800 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A25 1050 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A24 1250 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A52 1400 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A23 1600 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A53 1800 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/SMA,90˚,male
Tab. 2.67 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, flexible system cable types
i NOTEIn case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a shortsemi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors(N-type, female) of the modules. N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight".There doesn't appear to be a consensus on how much torque this is in detail. Connectorsuppliers recommends a torque of approx. 1,00 Nm. Avoid the twisting of the cable con-nectors during the connection.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 179
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
2.10.3 TerminatorsIt is necessary to terminate all unused RF-connectors of the RF-modules with 50 Ohmload resistors.The following resistors are used:– C39195-Z80-C30 for SMA connectors– C39195-Z80-C31 for SMC connectors
Fix the terminators at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set 1.00 Nm and at SMCconnectors with a torque wrench set 0.35 Nm. Later removal of terminators must donewith extreme care, to avoid damages at the RF front connectors of the modules.
i NOTEDUAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all un-used RX# connectors with a 50 Ohm SMC load resistor and RXCA# connectors with a50 Ohm SMA load resistor. In normal operation all open TX# inputs need not to be ter-minated.DIAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all un-used RX# connectors and RXCA# connectors with a 50 Ohm load resistors.FICOM: In normal operation all open TX connectors need not to be terminated. An openexpansion connector RF EXP has to be terminated with the terminator delivered withthe FICOM base module.
180 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
2.11 Post Installation NotesThe following instructions must carried before leaving the site:– At the end of the working day enable any alarms that should be active.– Contact the Network Control Center to announce your departure.– Close and lock the rack doors.– Ensure the site is secure or hand over to the person in charge / caretaker
If all installation activities are finished, any garbage must be cleared from site. Removeall packing material for recycling.
2.11.1 Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment
The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help preventpotential negative consequences for the environment and human health. It is a precon-dition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.
For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact yoursales representative.
The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is installed in thecountries of the European Union and is covered by the directive 2002/96/EC.
Countries outside the European Union may have other regulations regarding thedisposal of electrical and electronic equipment.
All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from themunicipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the governmentor the local authorities.
!WARNINGThe burning of rubbish should be avoided, as a burning of packaging material may giveoff toxic gases.
i NOTEFor dehydrating the rack during transportation and storage, a bag filled with Silica Gelis fitted into the rack by the factory. It is recommended to remove the bag, because aftera certain time the bag lost his function.
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 181
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
3 Appendix
3.1 Installation ToolsThe correct installation is carried out with the aid of the following tools:– Standard toolkit for BSS-installation H89999-B633– Tool set B89999-B148– Torque wrench set for SMA connectors (1,00 Nm)– Torque wrench set for SMC connectors (0,35 Nm)– Torque wrench 32 mm (25 Nm) for 7/16” connector mounting– Screw driver for torx screws T8, T10, T20, T25, T30, T40, T50 (length 200 mm)– Long screw driver for torx screws T30 (length 400 mm)– Engineer‘s wrenches for M12, M42 (SW 19, 65 mm)– Ratchet with insets for nuts M4, M5, M6, M8, M10 (SW 7, 8, 10, 13, 17 mm)– Security torx bit IPR25 (delivered by OMP)– Insulated torque wrench for Torx T30 (6 Nm) and an open ended 17 mm (20 Nm) for
battery mounting– Insulated hexagonal socket screw key or ratchet (M6) for connecting DC cables to
AD panel (Service1A) and DC panels (Base and Extension)– Tool for the removal / replacement of gas filled surge arrestor in the OVPT
(C39407-A149-A6)– Screw drivers for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm– Screw driver for slotted screw M3, M4, M5– Screw driver for pozi drive screws M3, M4, M5– Vacuum cleaner– Trimming tool for RF cables– 90˚ offset screw driver for torx screws T20– Adjuster feed wrench M42 (SW65)– Flat spanner SW19, SW50– Trimming tool for 1/2” coaxial cables– Hot air gun (or propane/butane blow torch)– Hard hat, dust mask– 4 ft step ladder– Fall protection equipment (for working in dangerous heights)
For installation of power supply, transmission equipment, antennas, cableways andother infrastructure equipment, additional tools may be necessary.
Refer for additional information to the Tool and Testequipment Database in the Siemensintranet: https://tte.erlm.siemens.de.
3.2 Ancillary MaterialThe following ancillary materials are needed:– adhesive tape– cable ties (different length)– wire end sleeves for 16 mm copper wires– cable lugs M8– paint retouch kit (Siemens Serial No. A500-C101-B261)– heat-shrink set including: heat-shrink sleeve for 1/2” coaxial cables (with adhesive
coating), cleaning tissue, heat protection tape, emery paper
182 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
3.3 Technical Data of BS-240/240XL
Parameter BS-240 / 240 II BS-240XL / 240 XL II
overall dimensions (HxWxD) 1600 x 600 x 450 mm 2050 x 600 x 450 mm
weights:rack (unequipped):frame with 4 ACOMframe with 4 CU + 2 MUCOframe with 6 AC/DCframe with battery set*DC Panel*dependend on battery type
60 kg / 60 kg40 kg / 60 kg40 kg / 40 kg27 kg / 35 kg130-180 kg / 130-180 kg10 kg
80 kg / 80 kg40 kg / 60 kg40 kg / 40 kg27 kg / 35 kg130-180 kg / 130-180 kg10 kg
mains input voltage (nominal):input voltage range:
-48 Vdc-40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc
-48 Vdc-40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc
mains input voltage (nominal):input voltage range:frequency (nominal):frequency range:
3 x 230 Vac207 Vac to 253 Vac50 Hz45 Hz to 65 Hz
3 x 230 Vac207 Vac to 253 Vac50 Hz45 Hz to 65 Hz
AC/DC converternominal output power
1600 W 1600 W
power consumption:TMAAMCOMUCOCU (GSM)ECU (Edge)FCUCOBACOSADC panelframeACOMbattery set
9 W25,5 W12,5 W150 W per module210 W per module310 W per module17 W17 W10 W60 W43 W20 W
9 W25,5 W12,5 W150 W per module210 W per module310 W per module17 W17 W10 W60 W43 W20 W
location condition: indoor
Abis link media: wire, fibre optic, microwave
CU per single rack: max. 8 max. 12
multiple cell per BTSE max. 12
no. of CU per Cell 1 - 12
Tab. 3.1 Technical Data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240XL / 240 XL II
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 183
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
external interfaces:TX/RX antennaAbis interface
mains input ACmains input DC
ground connectionexternal alarmsLMT
7/16, femaleterminal block (120 Ohm) or1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm)terminal block (max. AWG 8)terminal block (max. AWG 6), BS-240terminal block (max. AWG 2), BS-240 II,BS-240XL / XL IIbolt M8spring terminal blocksSubD 15, female, RJ45 connector
Parameter BS-240 / 240 II BS-240XL / 240 XL II
Tab. 3.1 Technical Data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240XL / 240 XL II
184 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
3.4 Configuration Overview
Fig. 3.1 Example for Configuration Overview (BS-240)
PULL: IDXxxx004097Rack: Baserack
BTS EQUIPMENT PLUS BS-240 BASE Rack SIEMENS23. March 2002
AD400S2268D (Sales Unique Name)
FUSE PANEL
FAN 0 FAN 1
F: CORE
CU 0 CU 1
CU 2 CU 3
CU 4 CU 5
CU 6 CU 7
CO
RE
0
CO
RE
2
CO
RE
3
DIAMCO 0 DIAMCO 1
FAN 4 FAN 5
FAN 2 FAN 3
F: ACOM
F: CU
ACOM 0 ACOM 1 ACOM 2 ACOM 3
CO
RE
1
CellConfigurationACOM no.
0 1 2 3
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 185
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
3.5 Checklist for Base Station Installation
Check Item Yes No
Rack fixed to floor and wall (wall excepted in erthquake zones)
Grounding
BTS connected to ground as described in section “ExternalCabling Activities”
Cable screens of all cables connected to ground at the cablewindow of the building
Power Supply
Cross section of power supply cable sufficient
power supply connection correspondend to TNS-or TT Networkrequirements
Cable window of the installation building equipped with lightningconductor
Cross section correspondend to cable length
External Alarms
External alarm cables with braided screen
Cable screen contacted to metal lid of cable feeding module
Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends
Overvoltage protection equipment present and correct installed
PCM Cables
PCM cables with braided screen
Cable screens connected with EMI panel of rack
Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends
CSU connector for cable screens correspondend toEMC requirements
Overvoltage protection equipment correct installed (if present)
Antenna Cables
Outer conductor of antenna cables connected to ground atantenna window
Grounding of antenna cables between antenna and antenna win-dow correpondend to grounding guideline
Antenna cable conductor protected against humidity at theground points
Tab. 3.2 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation
186 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 187
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
4 AbbreviationsAC Alternating Current
ACTC Alarm Collection Terminal ConnectionBoard
ACTM Alarm Collection Terminal for Base/Shelter
BSS Base Station System
BTS Base Transceiver Station
BTSE Base Transceiver Station Equipment
CAN Controller Area Network
COBA Core Basis
COSA Core Satellite
CU Carrier Unit
DC Direct Current
DIAMCO Dual Inline Amplifier Multicoupler
DUAMCO Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler
DUBIAS Duplexer Bias Path
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ESD Electrostatically Sensitive Device
FICOM FICOM
HPDU High Power Duplexer
HX Heat Exchanger
LE Link Equipment
NTPM Network Termination for PCM30
OVPT Overvoltage Protection and Tracer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
RF Radio Frequency
SBS Siemens Base Station System
188 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSEBS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
InstallationBase Transceiver Station Equipment
top related